The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About9/6/13 addendums2013alteration DOCUMENT 000491 ADDENDUM NO. 1 DATE:May 24, 2013 PROJECT NAME:City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades Iowa City Community School District This Addendum forms a part of the bidding and contract documents. This Addendum supersedes and supplements all portions of the original bidding and contract documents dated May 8, 2013 with which it conflicts. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM IN THESPACE PROVIDED ON THE BID FORM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY SUBJECT THE BIDDER TO DISQUALIFICATION. A. SPECIFICATIONS 1.Section 01 1100 -Summary of Work ADD a)the following to Paragraph 1.5.A: 1.All work associated with boiler flues hall be completed by August 16,2013. 2.All work in Rooms 0505B1 and 1802 shall also be completed by October 1, 2013. 2.Section 26 2923 -Variable Speed Motor Controllers ADD a)Danfoss is an acceptable manufacturer. B. DRAWINGS 1.Sheet M1.01-Mechanical HVAC Plan -Ground Level ADD a)Keyed Notes 16 and 17 as indicated on attached Supplemental Drawing M1. 2.Sheet M1.02-Mechanical HVAC Plans-Basement and First Levels ADD a)the following note to Plan 2, First Level Cafeteria Plan, and Plan 4, First Level Plan. The vents and/orcombustion air pipe penetrate a roof that is NOT under warranty. 3.Sheet M5.02-Mechanical Details ADD a)Detail 5, Water Heater Flue and Combustion Air Flashing, as indicated on attached Supplemental Drawing M2. 4.Sheet E1.01-Electrical Cafeteria Plan REVISE a)indicated type "L3"fixture designations to type "L4"as shownon attached Supplemental Drawing E1.ADD referenced electrical noteas follows: E5 in reference to conduit work above AHU-1. See attached Supplemental Drawing E2. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Addendum No. 1 000491-1 DOCUMENT 000491 ADDENDUM NO. 1 5.Sheet E1.03-Electrical Plans REVISE a)lighting fixture schedule by adding Notes 1 and 2, in reference to approved equivalent manufacturersper attached Supplemental DrawingE3. Prepared By:Shive-Hattery, Inc. _______________________________________ Timothy R. Fehr, P.E. Iowa License No. 12877 My registration renewal date is December 31, 2013. END OF DOCUMENT 000491 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Addendum No. 1 000491-2 DOCUMENT 000492 ADDENDUM NO. 2 DATE:May 31,2013 PROJECT NAME:City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades Iowa City Community School District This Addendum forms a part of the bidding and contract documents. This Addendum supersedes and supplements all portions of the original bidding and contract documents dated May 8, 2013 and Addendum No. 1 Dated May 24, 2013 with which it conflicts. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM IN THE SPACE PROVIDED ON THE BID FORM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY SUBJECT THE BIDDER TO DISQUALIFICATION. A. SPECIFICATIONS 1.Document 00 0800 -Supplementary Conditions General Conditions of the Contract for Construction REVISE a.Article 3.9 as follows: 3.9.1The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site at all times during performance of the Work, including work of the Contractor's subcontractors. Any change in superintendent personnel must be approved by the Owner. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. This individual shall be fluent in all languages necessary to communicate with Contractor's employees and subcontractors. Owner shall be furnished with the e-mail address and pager, home and cell phone numbers for the Superintendent. In the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.9.2, replace "as soon as practicable after award of the Contract"with "within ten (10) days of the date of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor". In the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.9.3, add the following language after the word "superintendent":"or other key personnel". ADD 2.Article 13.13 as follows: 13.13MANDATORY BACKGROUND CHECKS 13.13.1If selected to provide products and/or services to the District, the vendor shall participate in the District’s background check process for any persons providing products or performing services on District property.The vendor must complete and submit the background check form, provided by the District, for each such individual, at least two weeks prior to that individual providing products or performing services on District property.The cost of each background check, approximately $25, must be paid by the vendor to the District at the time the vendor submits the background check form. The District will provide to the vendor a badge for each individual approved through the background check process.The badge will include the name of the individual authorized to provide products or perform services on District property, the name of the vendor, and the school year for which the authorization is valid.This badge, along with a government-issued photo identification, must be City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Addendum No. 2 000492-1 DOCUMENT 000492 ADDENDUM NO. 2 The background check process must be repeated each shown to District personnel upon request. school year. No persons who are not approved by the District shall be permitted to provide any products to, or perform any services for, the District on District property.Contracts with vendors who fail to comply withthese requirements will be subject to immediate termination at the sole discretion of the District. 13.13.2For purposes of this specification, "VENDOR" shall be defined as a contractor and any representative or employee of a contractor, sub-contractor, sub-sub-contractor or vendor who receives an award of contract to provide products and/or services on District property. 13.13.3Any unapproved persons who desire to conduct a site visit or attend meetings on District property prior to the award of a contract for a project must sign in at the meeting or at the District property and then be accompanied by a District employee or designated representative of the District during the duration of the site visit or meeting. B. DRAWINGS 1.Sheet M1.02 -Mechanical HVAC Plans -Basement and First Levels a.Demolish and replaceconcrete sidewalk in three (3)locations and gas meter pad in one location to allow installation of gas main as indicated on attached Supplemental Drawing M1. b.Disconnect, lower and reconnect gas meter/regulator set as indicated on attached Supplemental Drawing M1. Prepared By:Shive-Hattery, Inc. _______________________________________ Timothy R. Fehr, P.E. Iowa License No. 12877 My registration renewal date is December 31, 2013. END OF DOCUMENT 000491 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Addendum No. 2 000492-2 PROJECT MANUAL FOR CITY HIGH SCHOOL CAFETERIA HVAC UPGRADES IOWA CITY COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT OWNER:Iowa CityCommunity School District Educational Services Center 1725 North Dodge Street Iowa City, Iowa 52245 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER:Shive-Hattery, Inc. 2834 Northgate Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52245 BIDS DUE:June 6, 2013 2:00p.m. Central Time Iowa City Community School District Educational Services Center 1725 North Dodge Street Iowa City, Iowa 52245 PREBID MEETING:May 16, 2013 10:00a.m. Central Time Physical Plant 1137 South Riverside Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52246 ISSUED FOR BID:May 8, 2013 END OF DOCUMENT 000001 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Cover 000001-1 DOCUMENT 00 0005 CERTIFICATIONPAGE I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Registered Architect under the laws of the State of Iowa. Signature:Date: Name: Registration Expires:June 30, 2014Date Issued: Pages, Sheets, or Divisions covered by this seal: I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Signature:Date: Name:Timothy R. Fehr, P.E. Iowa License Number:12877 My license renewal date is December 31, 2013 Pages, Sheets, or Divisions covered by this seal: I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Signature:Date: Name:Jake J. Henkle, P.E. Iowa License Number:12668 My license renewal date is December 31,2015 Pages, Sheets, or Divisions covered by this seal: END OF DOCUMENT 00 0005 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Certification Page 00 0005-1 DOCUMENT 00 0010 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0001PROJECT MANUAL COVER SHEET 00 0005CERTIFICATIONS PAGE 00 0010TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0015LIST OF DRAWINGS 00 0110 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING 00 0130ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 0200INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 0200.01INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS -MATERIAL PRODUCT OR EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST 00 0210SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 0410BID FORM 00 0422TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS CONTRACT FORM 00 0423TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS PARTICIPATION FORM 00 0430BID BOND 00 0500AGREEMENT 00 0611PERFORMANCE BOND 00 0612PAYMENT BOND 00 0700GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 0800SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 0801ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND CERTIFICATION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1100SUMMARY 01 1100.10SHUT DOWN/TIE IN PROCEDURES FOR OUTSIDE CONTRACTORS 01 1520CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01 2900PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 3100PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3300SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3510REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 6100PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 7329CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7500STARTING AND ADJUSTING 01 7700CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 7800CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7839PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 8400FIRESTOPPING 07 9005JOINT SEALERS DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09 2116GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 5000ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Table of Contents 00 0010-1 DOCUMENT 00 0010 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 22-PLUMBING 22 0500COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0519METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0700PLUMBING INSULATION 22 3400FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS DIVISION 23-HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0500COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0519METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0529HANGERS ANDSUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING ANDEQUIPMENT 23 0553IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0593TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0700HVAC INSULATION 23 0923AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM -DDC 23 1123FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 2113HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2123HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 3416FANS 23 5239HEATING BOILERS AND ACCESSORIES DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL 26 0100OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0500COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0519LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 0526GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533.01PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 26 2813FUSES 26 2816ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2913MOTOR STARTERS 26 2923VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 5100LIGHTING 26 5950OCCUPANCY SENSORS END OF DOCUMENT 00 0010 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Table of Contents 00 0010-2 SECTION 00 0015 LIST OF DRAWINGS GENERAL Cover Sheet ARCHITECTURAL A1.01Reflected Ceiling Pan and Chase Plan MECHANICAL MD.01Mechanical Demolition Plan -Ground Level MD.02Mechanical Demolition Plans -Basement and Ground Levels M1.01Mechanical HVAC Plan -Ground Level M1.02Mechanical HVAC Plans -Basement and First Levels M5.01Mechanical Details, Symbols and Abbreviations M6.01Mechanical Schedules ELECTRICAL ED.01Electrical Demolition Plan E1.01Electrical Cafeteria Plan E1.02Electrical Plans E1.03Electrical Schedules, Symbols, and Details END OF SECTION 00 0015 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 List of Drawings 00 0015-1 Division 00 Bidding Documents, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 00 Division SECTION 00 0110 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades Iowa CityCommunity School District, In the County of Johnson, State of Iowa To Whom It May Concern: You are hereby notified that at 6:00p.m. Local Time onMay 21, 2013 in theBoard Roomat Iowa City Community School District, Educational Services Center, 1725 North Dodge Street, Iowa City, Iowa there will be a public hearing on the proposed plans, specificationsand form of the City HighSchool Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades project.Any persons interested may appear and file objections to the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, or cost of such improvement. Published by order of the Board of Directors of the Iowa CityCommunitySchool District. By: ____________________________ (Name) Title:Secretary to the Board of Education Publish:May 8, 2013 END OF SECTION 00 0110 City High SchoolCafeteria HVAC Upgrades111394-1 Notice of Public Hearing 00 0110-1 SECTION 00 0130 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID BIDS DUE:June 6, 2013 2:00 p.m. Central Time Iowa City Community School District Educational Service Center 1725 North Dodge Street Iowa City, IA 52245 PROJECT:City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades OWNER:Iowa CityCommunity School District Educational Services Center 1725 North Dodge Street Iowa City, Iowa 52245 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER:Shive-Hattery, Inc. 2834 Northgate Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52245 Phone 319-354-3040 PREBID MEETING:May 16, 2013 10:00a.m. Central Time Physical Plant 1137 South Riverside Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Sealed bids will be received by the Owner at the Iowa CityCommunity School District, Educational Services Center at 1725 North dodge Street, IowaCity, Iowa until 2:00 p.m.Central Time, onJune 6,2013. Sealed bids will be opened and publicly read at the Iowa CityCommunity School District, Educational Service Center, Iowa City, Iowa at 2:00p.m., Central Time, on June 6,2013,or at such later time and place as may then be fixed. Bids will be consideredby the Owner at a public meeting to be held at Iowa CityCommunity School District, Educational Services Center, 1725 North DodgeStreet, Iowa City, Iowa at 6:00 p.m., Central Time, onJune 18, 2013, or at such later time and place as may then be fixed. The general nature of the work is as follows: Upgrades to the HVAC systems that serve the cafeteria and kitchen at City High School, for the purpose of improving humidity control.Included is related general construction and electrical work. The work is scheduled to start on July 1, 2013 and shall be substantially completed byMarch 21, 2014; refer to bid documents for specific phasing requirements. Bidding documentsmay be examined at the Architect/Engineer's office and at: Iowa CityCommunity School District, Educational Services Center, 1725 North Dodge Street, Iowa City, IA 52245 th Illowa Builders Exchange, 520 24Street, Rock Island, IL 61201 McGraw-Hill Construction Dodge, 3875 Elmore Avenue, Suite C, Davenport, IA 52807 McGraw-Hill Construction Dodge,2507 Ingersoll Avenue, Des Moines, IA 50312 nd Master Builders of Iowa, 645 32Avenue SW,Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 City High SchoolCafeteria HVAC Upgrades111394-1 Advertisement for Bid 00 0130-1 SECTION 00 0130 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID Master Builders of Iowa, 221 Park Street, Des Moines, IA 50309 Master Builders of Iowa, 612 Mulberry, Waterloo, IA 50703 Copies of the Bidding documents may be obtained on or after May 8, 2013 by Bidders and Subbidders at DB Reprographics, 810 Maiden Lane, Suite 1, Iowa City, Iowa 52240, (319) 359-1069 in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. It is requested thatbidders return the documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of bids. Each Bidder shall accompany the Bid with a Bid security, in a separate envelope, as security that the successful bidder will enter into a contract for the work bid upon and will furnish after the award of the contract corporate surety bond or bonds, acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of the contract, in an amount equivalent to one hundred percent of the amount of the contract. The bidder's security shall bein an amount equivalent to five percent (5%) percent of the bid amount, and shall be in the form of a cashier's or certified check drawn on a bank in Iowa or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States of America, or a certified bank sharedraft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States of America or a bid bond with corporate surety satisfactory to the Owner.The bid security will be held by the Owner until a contract is fully executed and bonds are approved by the Owner. Contractors using "materials, supplies, and equipment"on projects in designated "exempt entities"may purchase these items without liability for the sales tax. The contractor must have a purchasing agent authorization letter and an exemption certificate from the public entityto present to the retailer, which specifies the construction project and will be available for that project only. Iowa CityCommunity School District will issue an authorization letter and an exemption certificate to the contractor and/or subcontractors for the purchase or use of building materials, supplies, and equipment to be used on this project only. DO NOT INCLUDE SALES TAX ONYOUR BID FORM. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days afterthe date of the scheduled closing time for the receipt of bids. The District seeks to provide opportunities for Targeted Small Businesses in the awarding of contracts and is authorized to award contracts to Targeted Small Businesses per the Iowa Acts of the 73rd General Assembly, 1989 Regular Session, Senate File 2274. For further information about the Targeted Small Business policies, contact the manager of Buildings and Grounds. This project has a target for Targeted Small Business participation of ten percent (10%). Bidders shall be prepared to submit a performance and payment bond conditioned on the faithful performance of the contract. Out-of-state bidders shall be prepared to submit an Out-of-State Contractor Bond to the Iowa Division of Labor inaccordance with Chapter 91C of the Code of Iowa. By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa labor to the extent lawfully required under Iowa law. Iowa law provides that on public improvements a resident bidder shall be allowed preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country which gives or requires a preference to bidders from that state or foreign country. The preference so allowed shall be equivalent to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. City High SchoolCafeteria HVAC Upgrades111394-1 Advertisement for Bid 00 0130-2 SECTION 00 0130 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsible, responsivebidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the bidding requirements. The Owner reserves the right to waive informalities or irregularities. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids. Published by order of the Board of Directors of the Iowa CityCommunity School District. By: Duane Van Hemert Title: Director of Physical Plant Publish:May 8, 2013 City High SchoolCafeteria HVAC Upgrades111394-1 Advertisement for Bid 00 0130-3 DOCUMENT 00 0200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders (1997Edition), is the Instructions to Bidders and is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects State Office as follows: AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone: 515-244-7502 Fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org II. SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Refer to Document 00 0210.AIA for additions and amendments to these Instructions to Bidders. END OF DOCUMENT 00 0200 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Instructions to Bidders 00 0200-1 DOCUMENT 00 0200.01 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS MATERIAL, PRODUCT OR EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST PROJECT:City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades A/E:Shive-Hattery, Inc. 2834 Northgate Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52245 CONTRACTOR:OWNER:Iowa City Community School District 1725 North Dodge street Iowa City, Iowa52245 BY: DATE: SPECIFIED MATERIAL, PRODUCT OR EQUIPMENT: Related Specification Sections: Related Drawing Numbers PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: REASON FOR PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: ATTACHED DATA: Attach additional pages, if necessary. Item No.Description For Use by the Architect/Engineer: SUBSTITUTION:ApprovedNot Approved Approved as NotedNot Approved –Received too Late By:Date: END OF SECTION 00 0200.01 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Instructions to Bidders-Material, Product or Equipment Substitution Request 00 0200.01-1 DOCUMENT 00 0210 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS The following Supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "Instructions to Bidders", American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A701 -1997. Where any Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or clause or portion thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the unaltered portions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or clause or portion thereof shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1: DEFINITIONS No Supplements ARTICLE 2: BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS Add the following Paragraph 2.2 and Subparagraphs 2.2.1 thru 2.2.3: 2.2Preference 2.2.1The State of Iowa, its agencies, and its political subdivisions, including cities, school districts and public utilities are required by Iowa Code Section 73A.21 to require a reciprocalresident . bidder and resident labor force preference 2.2.2A"Resident Bidder"means a person or entity authorized to transact business in the State of Iowa and having a place of business for transacting business within the state at which it is conducting and has conducted business for at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement for the public improvement. If another state or foreign country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the more stringent definition is applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country. 2.2.3A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country other than Iowa if that state our foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state of foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state of foreign county. The preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. ARTICLE 3: BIDDING DOCUMENTS Delete Subparagraph 3.1.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph 3.1.1: 3.1.1Bidders may obtain complete sets of the bidding documents fromDP Reprographic, 810 Maiden Lane, Suite 1, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 319-359-1069,in accordance with the Advertisement for Bids. There is no deposit. It is requested that bidders return the documents to Technigraphics in good condition within ten days after receipt of bids. Add subparagraph 3.3.5 as follows: 3.3.5Substitution requests must be submitted by prospective bidders on Document 00 0200.01. Substitution requests from manufacturers, distributors, or other entities will be rejected without review. City High School CafeteriaHVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 00 0210-1 DOCUMENT 00 0210 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Delete Subparagraph 3.4.3 and replace with the following: 3.4.3Addenda will be issued in order to be received by all planholders of record not less than 48 hours prior to the date and time that bids are due, except an addendum withdrawing the Request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. ARTICLE 4: BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1Preparation of Bids Delete subparagraph 4.1.5 and substitute the following subparagraph 4.1.5: 4.1.5Bidders are required to bid all bids. Add the following Subparagraph 4.1.8 4.1.8Items shall be purchased free of any sales tax, as provided for in Section 7 of House File 2672 amends Section 422.42, subsections 15 and 16, Code Supplement 2001 and Section 10 amends Section 422.47, Code Supplement 2001, by adding new subsection 5. 4.1.9The Contractor shall take note and comply with all governing laws, rules, and regulations affecting the Work. This may include such laws, rules, and regulations as: 1.Licensing of Contractors for special requirements, e.g. hazardous waste removal. 2.Requirements for special construction permits. 3.Exemption from sales tax, if applicable. 4.Wage rates and employment requirements when required by law or by Owner. 5.Local labor requirements. 6.Non-discriminatory hiring practices. 7.Targeted small business participation. 8.WBE/MBE. 4.2Bid Security Subparagraph 4.2.1 Delete Subparagraph 4.2.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 4.2.1Each Bidder shall accompany the bid with a bid security, in a separate envelope, as security that the successful Bidder will enter into a Contract for the work bid upon and will furnish after the award of the Contract, a corporate surety bond or bonds, acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of the Contract, in an amount equivalent to 100% of the amount of the Contract. The Bidder's security shall be 5% of the Bid amount, and shall be in the form of a cashier's or certified check drawn on a bank in Iowa or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, or a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States or abid bond from a corporate surety satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Paragraph 6.2. Bid security of the successful City High School CafeteriaHVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 00 0210-2 DOCUMENT 00 0210 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS bidder will be held by the Owner until an Agreement is fully executed and bonds are received and acceptable to the Owner. 4.3Submission of Bids Delete Subparagraph 4.3.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph 4.3.1: All copies of the Bid and other documents, not including the bid security, required to be submitted with the Bid, shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope, the bid security, if any, shall be submitted in a separate sealed opaque envelope. Each envelope shall bear the return address of the bidder and shall be addressed as follows: TO:Iowa CityCommunity School District Educational Service Center ADDRESS:1725 North Dodge Street Iowa City, Iowa 52245 BID FOR:City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades Or as applicable: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades BID SECURITY FOR: Iowa CityCommunity School District Each bidder who is not a Targeted Small Business (TSB) and who will be using a TSB subcontractor or supplier shall submit with the bid on the Targeted Small Business Participation Form provided herein, the name(s) of Iowa Targeted Small Business(es) to which a subcontract will be awarded, a description of the work to be performed, and the dollar amount assigned to the work to be performed. If a prime contractor fails to meet the Targeted Small Business participation goal indicated, the prime contractor shall provide a list of Targeted Small Business(es) contacted on the Targeted Small Business Contact Form provided herein. If the Bid, the bid security, if any, and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid are sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shallbe enclosed in a separate mail envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. 4.5Pre-Bid Conference 4.5.1The Advertisement for Bids includes notification of a pre-bid conference for the purpose of answering questions and providinginformation to prospective Bidders. The pre-bid conference will be held at Iowa City Community School District Physical Plant, 1137 South Riverside Drive, Iowa City, Iowa on May 6, 2013at 10:00a.m. Central Time. ARTICLE 5: CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.3Acceptance of Bid (Award) Delete subparagraph 5.3.1 and substitute the following subparagraph: City High School CafeteriaHVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 00 0210-3 DOCUMENT 00 0210 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5.3.1It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract or multiple contracts to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder(s) provided the Bid(s) has/have been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does/do not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid or Bids received and to accept the Bid(s) which, in the Owner's judgment, is/are in the Owner's best interests. Delete subparagraph 5.3.2 and substitute the following subparagraph: 5.3.2The Owner shall have the right to accept any or all Base Bids and corresponding Alternate Bids, and to determine the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and corresponding Alternate Bid. The Owner shall have the right to accept any or all Alternate Bids. ARTICLE 6: POST-BID INFORMATION Add Subparagraph 6.1.1 as follows: 6.1.1Out-of-state-bidders shall furnish documentation prior to execution of the Agreement that confirms the Bidder is in compliance with Chapter 91C Construction Contractors and Chapter 490 Business Corporation Division XV Foreign Corporations of the Code of Iowa. ARTICLE 7: PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND No Supplements ARTICLE 8: FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 8.1Execution of Agreement Add the following Paragraph 8.1 Execution of Agreement: 8.1The selected Bidder shall, within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award, sign and deliver the required number of executed counterparts of the Agreement along with any required attached documents. Within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of executed documents from the selected Bidder, the Owner shall deliver one fully executed counterpart to the Contractor. END OF DOCUMENT 00 0210 City High School CafeteriaHVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 00 0210-4 DOCUMENT 00 0410 BID FORM PROJECT:City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades BID TO:Iowa City Community School District Educational Service Center 1725 North Dodge Street Iowa City, Iowa 52245 BID FROM: (Legal Name) NOTE: Submit one copy of this Bid Form. All blanks shall be completed. Only bids on this form will be accepted. Submit Bid Security, if required, in separate envelope. Bidder shall carefully review the Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders prior to completing this form. 1.The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the schedule indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement for Bids and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for thirty (30) days after the day of Bid opening. 2.The undersigned Bidder submits, herewith, bid security in accordance with the terms set forth in the Advertisement for Bids and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. 3.The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents and the following Addenda, receiptof all which is hereby acknowledged: DateNumber 4.BIDDER has visited thesite and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 5.BIDDER is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 6.BIDDER will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s): BASE BID: DOLLARS($) (words) Amount shall be indicated in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount indicated in words will govern. 7.BIDDER agrees that the Work will be completed in accordance with the project schedule in the Advertisement for Bids.. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Bid Form 00 0410-1 DOCUMENT 00 0410 BID FORM 8.Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or in connection with any other person, organization or corporation bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in conformance with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between and conditions of the bidder's proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by Architect/Engineer the provisions of the latter shall prevail. 9.Bidder certifies this proposal is madein good faith, without collusion or in connection with any other person, organization, or corporation bidding on the work. 10.The following documents are attached or submitted separately and made a condition of this Bid: a.Required Bid Security in the amountof _______________ and in the form of __________________ (SUBMITTED IN A SEPARATE ENVELOPE) b.Targeted Small Business Contact and Participation forms. It is hereby agreed that when submitting this bid to the Iowa City Community School District the Contractor warrants that it has taken documented steps to encourage the participation in TSBs for the purpose of subcontracting and supplying of materials. The proper forms must be attached to this bid. 11.This Bid is submitted on June 6, 2013. 12.State Contractor License No._______________________ 13.The bidder shall not make any revisions to the bid form and shall not devise any alternates other than those provided. Any such notes, revisions, or comments shall be grounds for rejection of the bid as not being responsive. 14.Complete the applicable item(s) listed below. If this Bid is submitted by an agent of BIDDER, attach a current Power-of-Attorney certifying the agent's authority to bind the BIDDER. If BIDDER is: A Resident Bidder By: Bidder: OR ANonresident Bidder From: (state or country) State whether any preference (as described in Article 2 in Section 00 0210 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders) is in effect in the nonresident bidder’s state or country at the time of this bid and identify the source of the regulation: By: Bidder: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Bid Form 00 0410-2 DOCUMENT 00 0410 BID FORM An Individual By: (signature of individual)(typed or printed name) doing business as: Business Address: Phone No. A Partnership By: (Firm Name) (signature of general partner)(typed or printed name) Business Address: Phone No. A Corporation By: (Corporation Name) (State of Incorporation) By: (signature of person authorized to sign) (typed or printed name and title) Attest: (Secretary) Business Address: Phone No. END OF DOCUMENT 00 0410 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Bid Form 00 0410-3 DOCUMENT 00 0422 TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS CONTACT FORM LIST TSB SUBCONTRACTORS OR SUPPLIERS CONTACTED THAT DECLINED PARTICIPATION ENCLOSE WITH THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS PROJECT: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades Iowa City Community School District CONTRACT: Same Bidder's Company NameArea Code/Telephone AddressCityStateZip Code Bidder didcontact the following certified Iowa Targeted Small Business(es): 1. TSB Company NameAddress Contact Name Date ContactedTelephone Number Reason for Declining Participation 2. TSB Company NameAddress Contact NameDate ContactedTelephone Number Reason for Declining Participation 3. TSB Company NameAddress Contact NameDate ContactedTelephone Number Reason for Declining Participation (Use second sheet if more than three firms contacted.) If Bidder didnotcontact any certified Targeted Small Business, state reason(s) why: Date______________________________ Signature of Bidder (The same person that signs the Bid Form) ______________________________________ END OF DOCUMENT 00 0422 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Targeted Small Business Contact Form 00 0422-1 DOCUMENT 00 0423 TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS PARTICIPATION FORM LIST TSB SUBCONTRACTORS OR SUPPLIERS ENCLOSE WITH THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS PROJECT: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Iowa City Community School District CONTRACT: Same Bidder's Company NameArea Code/Telephone AddressCityStateZip Code Bidder is / is not a certified Iowa Targeted Small Business. If bidder is awarded a contract for the above-listed project, the bidder proposes for Owner approval the award of a subcontract to the following certified Iowa Targeted Small Business(es): 1. TSB Company NameAddress Description of WorkDollar Amount 2. TSB Company NameAddress Description of WorkDollar Amount 3. TSB Company NameAddress Description of WorkDollar Amount 4. TSB Company NameAddress Description of WorkDollar Amount (Use second sheet if more than four firms will be proposed.) Date ________________________ Signature ofBidder (The same person that signs the Bid Form)______________________________________ City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Targeted Small Business Participation Form 00 0423-1 DOCUMENT 00 0423 TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS PARTICIPATION FORM TARGETED SMALL BUSINESSES AS CERTIFIED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT A complete listing of all Targeted Small Businesses can be found at: http://www.iowai.net/iowa/dia/tsb/menu The listing is the most current source of Targeted Small Businesses provided by the Iowa Department of Economic Development, Des Moines, IA. END OF DOCUMENT 00 0423 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Targeted Small Business Participation Form 00 0423-2 DOCUMENT 00 0430 BID BOND I.BID BOND A.Where it is provided in the Instructions to Bidders that the Bidder may submit a bid bond as the bid security, the Bidder mayuse AIA Document A310 -1970 "Bid Bond." AIA Document A310 -1970 is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone: 515-244-7502 Fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org END OF DOCUMENT 00 0430 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Bid Bond 00 0430-1 DOCUMENT 00 0500 AGREEMENT I.AGREEMENT A.AIA Document A101 "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor" (2007 Edition), where the basis of payment is a stipulated Sum, forms the basis of the contract between the Owner and Contractor and is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. All provisions which are not amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone: 515-244-7502 Fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org END OF DOCUMENT 00 0500 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Agreement 00 0500-1 DOCUMENT 00 0611 PERFORMANCE BOND I.PERFORMANCE BOND A.AIA Document A312 "Performance Bond" is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. All provisions which are not amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. This form can be purchased fromthe American Institute of Architects state office at: AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone: 515-244-7502 Fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org END OF DOCUMENT 00 0611 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Performance Bond 00 0611-1 DOCUMENT 00 0612 PAYMENT BOND I.PAYMENT BOND A.AIA Document A312 "Payment Bond" is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. All provisions which are not amended or supplemented remain in full and extent. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 phone: 515-244-7502 fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org END OF DOCUMENT 00 0612 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Payment Bond 00 0612-1 DOCUMENT 00 0700 GENERAL CONDITIONS I.GENERAL CONDITIONS A.AIA Document A201 -2007 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" is the General Conditions between the Owner and Contractor and is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. The document can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone: 515-244-7502 Fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org II.SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A.Refer to Document 00 0800, Supplementary Conditions, for amendments to these General Conditions. END OF DOCUMENT 00 0700 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 General Conditions 00 0700-1 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 The following Supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A201 –2007. Where any Article, Section, Section or clause or portion thereof of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of that Article, Section, Section or clause or portion thereof shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS No Supplements ARTICLE 2: OWNER 2.1GENERAL Add the following Clause 2.1.1.1 to Section 2.1.1: 2.1.1.1The Owner is: Name:Iowa City Community School District Legal Status:A public school district Address:1725 North Dodge Street Iowa City, Iowa 52245 Telephone No.319-688-1020 Add the following Clause 2.1.1.2 to Section 2.1.1: 2.1.1.2The Owner's Authorized Contract Representative is: Name:Duane Van Hemert, Direct of Physical Plant Legal Status:IowaCityCommunity School District Address:1137 South Riverside Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Telephone No.319-688-1020 Fax No.319-688-1029 2.2INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Delete Section 2.2.3 and substitute the following Section 2.2.3: 2.2.3The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project and a legal description of the site. The furnishing of this information does not make the Owner responsible for the accuracy of the information and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to satisfy himself relative to the accuracy and completeness of such . informationThe Contractor shall exercise proper precautions relatingto the safe performance of the work. Delete Section 2.2.5 and substitute the following Section 2.2.5: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-1 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 2.2.5The Owner will furnish the Contractor ten(10)copies of the Contract Documents for use in execution of the Work. The Contractor may purchase additional copies at the cost of reproduction, postage, and handling. ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR 3.3SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Add the following Sections 3.3.4, 3.3.5: and 3.3.6 3.3.4For renovation work is scheduled to start on June 10, 2013 and shall be substantially competed by August 9, 2013. 3.3.5The Owner reserves the right to retain ownership to any materials or equipment that is part of the existing facility. If material or equipment is to be removed from the site, the Contractor shall detach such items and before removing from site, obtain permission from the Owner, or his designee, to do so. All items not retained by Owner shall be removed in a propermanner by the Contractor. 3.3.6 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner before construction begins one copy of Material Safety Data Sheets of hazardous substances to be stored on the Owner's premises or incorporated in the performance of this contract. The Contractor shall also keep Material Safety Data Sheets posted at the work site for all substances while these substances are on the Owner's premises. Hazardous substances shall be any substance which is covered by Law (Right to Know Rules). 3.6TAXES Delete the language in Section 3.6 and substitute the following Sections: 3.6.1This Project is exempt from State and local sales and use taxes on sales of building materials and fixtures to construction contractors for incorporation into real estate for governmental bodies of the State of Iowa. The Contractor shall continue to pay sales tax on items that do not become a part of the Project. For details, refer to http://www.state.ia.us/tax/business/Contr-ExEnt-Index.html. 3.6.2The Owner as a designated exempt entity will complete an online application to register this Project with the Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance. The Owner will distribute Tax Exemption Certificates and Authorization Letters to the Contractor and all Subcontractors who have been identified at, or before filing of the Performance Bond. 3.6.3On or before the time the Performance Bond is filed, the Contractor shall provide a listing to the Owneridentifying all Subcontractors. Contractor and Subcontractors shall make copies of the Tax Exemption Certificate and provide a copy to each supplier providing construction material. This Certificate will allow the Contractor and Subcontractors to purchase qualified building materials free from sales tax for the Project. The Tax Exemption Certificate and Authorization Letter have been developed exclusively for this purpose and are applicable only for this specific Project. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-2 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 3.6.4If the online registration is not available at the time The Contract is approved by the Owner, the Owner will notify the Contractor, in writing, and the cost of sales tax on all construction materials used for the Project will be added to the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall then submit Form 35-002 to the Owner for Iowa sales/use tax paid. 3.6.5Payment will be made in accordance with the payment provisions set out in these specifications and the Advertisement for Bids and Notice of Public Hearing. Notwithstanding anything in these specifications and the Advertisement for Bides and Notice of Public Hearing to the contrary, no Final Payment shall be released until Form 35-002 has been filed with the Owner, where applicable, and all lien waivers are on file. 3.6.6Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Contractor shall file with Owner forms contemplated by the Iowa Code enabling Owner to apply for a refund for any sales or use tax paid in carrying out the work. 3.7PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Delete Section 3.7.5 and substitute the following Section 3.7.5: 3.7.5If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor knowingly encounters and recognizes human remains, burial markers, archeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains and features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence or good faith belief of such existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. Add the following Section 3.7.6and associated clauses3.7.6.1thru 3.7.6.3: 3.7.6The State of Iowa, its agencies, and its political subdivisions, including cities, school districts and public utilities are required by Iowa Code Section 73A.21 to require a reciprocal resident bidder and . resident labor force preference 3.7.6.1A"Resident Bidder"means a person or entity authorized to transact business in the State of Iowa and having a place of business for transacting business within the state at which it is conducting and has conducted business for at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement for the public improvement. If another state or foreign country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the more stringent definition is applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country. 3.7.6.2A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country other than Iowa if that state our foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state of foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state of foreign county. The preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-3 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 3.7.6.3If the Contractor is anonresident bidder the Contractor is required to specify in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor whether any preference (as described in 3.7.6.2) is in effect in the nonresident bidder’s state or country at the time of this bid and identify the source of the regulation. 3.9SUPERINTENDENT Delete Sections 3.9.2 and 3.9.3 in their entirety. 3.10CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Delete the last sentence of Section 3.10.2 so that the Section now reads: 3.10.2The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, andshall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect's approval. The Architect's approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.12SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Add the following Section 3.12.11: 3.12.11The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals will be limited to examination of an initial submittal plus two (2) re-submittals. The Owner is entitled to obtain reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid the Architect for evaluation of additional re-submittals. 3.18ARTICLE 4: ARCHITECT 4.1GENERAL Delete Section 4.1.1 and substitute the following Section 4.1.1: 4.1.1The "Architect" is defined in this Contract as the Engineer or Architect lawfully licensed by the State to practice architecture or engineering or an entity, licensed by the State to lawfully practice architecture or engineering identified as such in this Contract and as is referred to throughout the Contract documents as if singular in number. The term "Engineer," "Architect/Engineer," "Engineer/Architect," "Architect's authorized representative," "Engineer's authorized representative," or Architect/Engineer's authorized representative" shall mean "Architect" as defined in this Section. 4.1.1.1The Architect is: Name:Shive-Hattery, Inc. Address:2834 Northgate Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52245 Phone No.:319-354-3040 Fax No.:319-354-6921 Project Contact Person:Timothy R. Fehr, P.E. Direct Phone No.319-354-3040 Project Contact Email:tfehr@shive-hattery.com City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-4 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 4.2ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Add Clause 4.2.2.1 to Section 4.2.2: 4.2.2.1The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid the Architect for site visits made necessary by the fault of the Contractor or by defects and deficiencies in the Work. ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTSAND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Delete Section 5.2.1 and substitute with the following Section 5.2.1: 5.2.1Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, within seven (7) calendar days after award of the contract and prior to execution of the contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will reply within 14 calendar days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity, or (2) to state that the Architect requires additional time and/or information to complete the review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14 calendar dayperiod shall constitute notice of no reasonable objections. ARTICLE 6: CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS No Supplements ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1GENERAL Add the following Section 7.1.4 and associated clauses 7.1.4.1 thru 7.1.4.7: 7.1.4The combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner of a change in the Work shall be based on the following schedule: 7.1.4.1For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost. 7.1.4.2For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractors, 5 percent of the amount due the Subcontractors. 7.1.4.3For each Subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost. 7.1.4.4For each Subcontractor involved, for Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub- subcontractors, 5 percent of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-5 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 7.1.4.5The maximum allowable combined overhead and profit passed through to the Owner under any circumstances shall be a maximum of 25 percent. 7.1.4.6Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Section 7.3.7. 7.1.4.7In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their property can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by acomplete itemization of costs including labor, materials, and subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $500.00 be approved without such itemization. 7.2CHANGE ORDERS Add the following Section 7.2.2: 7.2.2The forms used to process a Change Order will include AIA Document G701, Change Order. ARTICLE 8: TIME 8.1DEFINITIONS Delete Section 8.1.4 and substitute the following Section 8.1.4: 8.1.4The term "Day(s)" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar days. ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Delete Section 9.3.1 and substitute the following Section 9.3.1: 9.3.1At least thirty (30)calendar days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers. If the Contract Documents required the Owner to retain a portion of the payments until some future time, the Applications for Payment shall clearly state the percentage and the amount to be retained. Add the following sentence to Section 9.3.1: The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized current edition of AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by current edition of AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet. The initial Application for Payment shall not be submitted until the construction schedule is submitted and approved by the Owner and the rooftop shop drawings are submitted. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-6 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 Add the following Clause 9.3.1.3 to Section 9.3.1: 9.3.1.3Until Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay ninety-five (95)percentof the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. 9.5DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION Delete Section 9.5.3 in its entirety. 9.8SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Delete Subparagraph 9.8.1 and substitute the following subparagraph: 9.8.1Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work. Defined by Iowa law is being when any of the following occurs: 1)The work on the public improvement or on the designated portion is substantially completed in general accordance with the terms of the contract so that the governmental entity or the department can occupy or utilize the public improvements or designated portion of the public improvement for its intended purpose. 2)The public improvement project is certified as having been substantially completed by either of the following: (a)The architect or engineer authorized to make such certification. (b)The authorized contract representative. 3)The governmental entity or the department is occupying or utilizing the public improvement for its intended purpose. Delete Section 9.8.2 Delete Section 9.8.3 Add the following Clause 9.8.3.1 to Section 9.8.3: 9.3.8.1The Architect will perform no more than oneinspectionper discipline (mechanical, electrical, architectural, structural, civil) to determine whether the Work or a designated portion thereof has attained Substantial Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for the amounts paid to the Architect for any additional inspections. 9.10FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Add the following Clause 9.10.1.1 to Section 9.10.1: 9.10.1.1The Architect will perform no more than two inspections to determine whether the Work or a designated portion thereof has attained Final Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for the amounts paid to the Architect for any additional inspections. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-7 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 Add the following Section 9.10.6: 9.10.6Final payment will be made not less than (30)calendardaysafter the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner subject to the provisions of Sections 9.10.1 through 9.10.5. The following documents shall be completed by the contract completion date listed on the Form of Agreement and shall be received prior to making final payment: a.Letter of Completion from Contractor b.Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims –AIA G706 c.Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens –AIA G706A d.Consent of Surety to Final Payment –AIA G707 e.Lien Waiver for full amount of contract from the Contractor f.Non-resident Contractors –release from the Department of Revenue g.Guarantees/warranties h.Certificate of Occupancy, if required i.Contractor-prepared "record drawings" j.Contractor certification that no asbestos-containing building materials were provided or installed in the Work. Add the following Section 9.10.7 and Clauses 9.10.7.1 thru 9.10.7.4: 9.10.7The following clauses are in accordance with Iowa Code, Chapter 26, Section 26.13, Early Release of Retainage, and are reiterated here for reference. Other provisions of Chapter 26, Chapter 573, and other applicable Chapters of the Code also apply 9.10.7.1At any time after all work on the project is substantially completed, the Contractor may request the release of all or part of the retained funds owed. The request shall be accompanied by a sworn statement of the Contractor that, ten (10) calendar days prior to filing the request, notice was given as required by Section 7 (of Chapter 26) to all known subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers. 9.10.7.2Except as provided under Section 3 (of Chapter 26), upon receipt of such request, the Owner shallrelease all or part of the retained funds. Retained funds that are approved as payable shall be paid at the time of the next monthly payment or within 30 calendar days, whichever is sooner. If partial retained funds are released pursuant to a Contractor's request, no retained funds shall be subsequently held based on that portion of the work. If within 30 calendar days of when payment becomes due the Owner does not release the retained funds due, interest shall accrue on the amount of retained funds at the rate of interest that is calculated as the prime rate plus one percent per year as of the day interest begins to accrue until the amount is paid. 9.10.7.3If labor and/or materials are yet to be provided at the time the request for the release of the retained funds is made, an amount equal to 200% of the value of the labor and/or materials yet to be provided, as determined by the Owner, may be withheld until such labor and/or materials are provided. 9.10.7.4An itemization of the labor and/or materials yet to be provided, or the reason that the request of retained funds is denied, shall be provided to the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the receipt for release of retained funds. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-8 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 Add the following Section 9.11 to ARTICLE 9: 9.11LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 9.11.2The Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner for any extra costs for engineering or architectural services, construction observation services and related expenses necessitated by the delayed prosecution of the Work by the Contractor beyond the date of Substantial Completion required by the Agreement. Such costs are in no way a penalty, but represent additional expenses to the Owner caused by the Contractor's delay in completing the Work. ARTICLE 10: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Add to Subparagraph 10.2.2: 10.2.2.…Include Statement of Compliance regarding Iowa's Smoke Free Air Act and the new Iowa Sex Offender law which no longer allows registered sexoffenders to be on school property without the school's permission. See attached Acknowledgement and Certification that all Contractors/Subcontractors/Suppliers/Vendors should be asked to sign. Delete Section 10.2.4 and substitute the following Section 10.2.4: 10.2.4When use, handling, and/or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods is necessary for execution of the work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice and shall exercise utmost careand carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. Add the following sentence to Section 10.3.4. 10.3.4No product containing asbestos, Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB), lead-based materials or any other hazardous materialidentified by the United State Environmental Protection Agency shall be incorporated into the Work. Add the following Section 10.3.7 10.3.7The Owner's existing facility where the Project is being constructed is likely to contain asbestos. The location of asbestos materials (if present) is on file with the Owner. The Contractor shall not remove or disturb any asbestos materials unless licensed to do so in the State where this Project is located. If asbestos must be removed and such removal is not alreadya part of this Contract, contact the Owner who will arrange for the proper removal of the asbestos materials by others if it is mutually agreed the asbestos materials needs to be removed. ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Add the following Clauses 11.1.2.1 through 11.1.2.4 to Section 11.1.2: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-9 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 11.1.2.1Worker's Compensation Insurance and Employer's Liability insurance shall be carried by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the statutes of the Stateor States in which the work will be performed plus Federal Laws. 11.1.2.2The limits for Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage for Premises-Operations, Independent Contractors'Protective, Products-Completed Operations, Contractual Liability, Personal Injury and Broad Form Property Damage (including coverage for Explosion, Collapse and Underground hazards) shall be as follows: $2,000,000 general aggregate $2,000,000 products/completed operations aggregate $1,000,000 personal and advertising injury $1,000,000 each occurrence personal injury $250,000 Fire Damage on any one fire $10,000 on Medical Expense on any one person Products/Completed Operations Aggregate, maintain for two (2) years after final payment: $1,000,000; Broad form property damage coverage shall include completed operations Aggregate Limits per Project Endorsement or Equivalent Coverage extends to explosion, collapse, and underground hazards .1 The policy shall be endorsed to have the General Aggregate apply to this Project only. .2 The policy shall be written on an occurrence form of coverage. .3 The policy shall include coverage for the hazards of underground explosion and collapse. 11.1.2.3Business automobile liability including hired and non-owned automobile liability with limits not less than: $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property damage 11.1.2.4Excess/umbrella liability coverage shall be provided with limits of: $2,000,000 each occurrence $2,000,000 general aggregate Add the following Clause 11.1.3.1 to Section 11.1.3: 11.1.3.1 If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be ACORD form 25-S, completed and supplemented in accordance with AIA Document G715, Instruction Sheet and Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S. Delete Section 11.1.4 and replace it with the following Section 11.1.4: 11.1.4The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage and excess umbrella liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include 1) the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees as additional insureds for the claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions during Contractor's operations and 2) the Owneras an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions during Contractor's completed operations. The commercial liability coverage shall be primary and non- contributory for benefit of additional insureds and provide for severability of interest for additional insureds. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-10 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 Add the following Section 11.1.5: 11.1.5All insurance coverages provided by the Contractor under Section 11 shall provide for a waiver of subrogation to the Owner, Architect and Architect's consultants, and agents and employees. Add the following Section 11.1.6 and Clauses 11.1.6.1 thru 11.1.6.4: 11.1.6All liability policies which include the Owner as an additional insured shall include a Governmental Immunities Endorsement, pursuant to Chapter 670.4 of the Iowa Code, which endorsement shall include the following provisions: 11.1.6.1Non-waiver of Government Immunity: The insurance carrier expressly agrees and states that the purchase of this policy and including the Owner asan Additional Insured does not waive any of the defenses of governmental immunity available to the Owner under Iowa Code Section 670.4 as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time. 11.1.6.2Claims Coverage: The insurance carrier further agrees that this policy of insurance shall cover only those claims not subject to the defenses of governmental immunity under Iowa Code Section 670.4 as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time. 11.1.6.3Assertion of Government Liability:The Owner shall be responsible for asserting any defense of governmental immunity, and may do so at any time and shall do so upon the timely written request of the insurance carrier. 11.1.6.4Non-Denial of Coverage: The insurance carrier shall not denycoverage or deny any of the rights and benefits accruing to the Owner under this policy for reasons of governmental immunity unless and until a court of competent jurisdiction has ruled in favor of the defense(s) of governmental immunity asserted by the Owner. 11.3Add the following Clause 11.3.1.6 to Section 11.3.1: 11.3.1.6The insurance required by Section 11.3 is not intended to cover machinery, tools or equipment owned or rented by the Contractor which are utilized in the performance of the Work but not incorporated into the permanent improvements.The Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s own expense, provide insurance coverage for owned or rented machinery, tools or equipment which shall be subject to the provisions of Section 11.3.7. 11.4PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS Delete Section 11.4.1 and substitute the following Section and Clauses: 11.4.1The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be obtained through the Contractor's usual source and the cost shall be included in the Contract sum. The amount of each bond shall be equivalent to 100 percent of the Contract Sum. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-11 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 11.4.1.1The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three calendar days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, priorto commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished. 11.4.1.2The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Add the following Clause 12.2.2.4 to Section 12.2.2: 12.2.2.4Upon request by the Owner and prior to the expiration of two-year from the date of Substantial Completion, the Architect will conduct and the Contractor shall attend a meeting with the Owner to review the facility operations and performance. ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1GOVERNING LAW Delete the language in Section 13.1 and substitute the following language: The Contract shall be governed by the law of the State of Iowa. 13.6INTEREST Delete language in Section 13.6.and substitute the following language: Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date the payment is due and shall bear interest at the rate established by Sections 74A.2 and 573.12, Code of Iowa, latest revision. 13.7TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS Delete Section 13.7 in its entirety and substitute the following Section 13.7.1 and Clauses 13.7.1.1 thru 13.7.1.3: 13.7.1As between the Owner and the Contractor, the commencement of the statutory limitation period shall be as follows: 13.7.1.1Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-12 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 13.7.1.2Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statue of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment. 13.7.1.3After Final Certificate of Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Section 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last. Add the following Section 13.8 to ARTICLE 13: 13.8EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY The Contractor shall conform in all respects with the provisions of the Federal Civil Rights Act, the Code of Iowa, Chapter 216 Civil Rights Commission and the rules and regulations adopted thereto by the Iowa Civil Rights Commission. The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant because of race,color, religion, sex, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, ancestry, age, marital status, physical or mental handicap. The Contractor shall require similar clauses in all of its subcontracts for service or materials. 13.9Work Hours 13.9.1TheContractor shall perform no work outside of the Owner's regular hours of 6:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Monday through Friday (except legal holidays) without written approval of the Owner unless noted elsewhere in the contract documents. 13.10Smoking 13.10.1Smoking is not allowed on the Owner's premises. The word "premises"for purposes of this section shall include inside personal or Company trucks or automobiles parked on school property. 13.11Sex Offender Acknowledgment and Certification 13.11.1Iowa law prohibits a sex offender who has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor from being present upon the real property of the schools of the District. The Contractor, all sub- contractors, suppliers and vendors acknowledge and certify that, pursuantto law, a sex offender who has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor may not operate, manage, be employed by, or act as a contractor, sub-contractor, supplier or vendor at the schools of the District. TheContractor and all sub-contractors, suppliers and vendors shall provide a signed original of an Acknowledgment and Certification letter (provided at the end of this section). No worker of the Contractor or any sub-contractor, supplier or vendor will be allowed to work, deliver or conduct business on site until this letter is received by the Architect. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-13 DOCUMENT 00 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-2007 It shall be responsibility of the Contractor to provide the Acknowledgment and Certification letter to all sub-contractors, suppliers and vendors. An initial list of sub-contractors, suppliers and vendors shall be provided to the Architect with the signed contract. Updates to the sub-contractor/supplier/vendor list shall be provided to the Architect within three (3)calendardays after any additional entities are contracted by the Contractor. ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT No Supplements ARTICLE 15: CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Add Clauses 15.1.5.3 and 15.1.5.4 to Section 15.1.5: 15.1.5.3Claims for increase in the Contract Time shall set forth in detail the circumstances that form the basis for the Claim, the date upon which each cause of delay began to affect the progress of the Work, the date upon which each cause of delay ceased to affect the progress of the Work and the number of days'increase in the Contract Time claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay. The Contractor shall provide such supporting documentation as the Owner may require including, where appropriate, a revised construction schedule indicating all the activities affected by the circumstances forming the basis of the Claim. 15.1.5.4The Contractor shall not be entitled to a separate increase in the Contract Time for each one of the number of causes of delay which may have concurrent or interrelated effects on the progress of the Work, or for concurrent delays due to the fault of the Contractor. Delete Section 15.1.6 Claims for Consequential Damages Add the following sentence to Section 15.1.6: If, before expiration of 30 calendar days from the date of execution for this Agreement, the Owner obtains by separate agreement and furnishes to the Contractor a similar waiver of all claims from the Architect against the Contractor for consequential damages which the Architect may incur as a result of any act or omission of the Owner or Contractor, thenthe waiver of consequential damages by the Owner and Contractor contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be applicable to the claims by the Contractor against the Architect. 15.2INITIAL DECISION MAKER Delete last sentence of Section 15.2.5 and substitute the following: If the parties do not mutually agree with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker, then resolution shall be subject to mediation, arbitration, litigation, or any other alternative dispute resolution process mutually agreeable to by the parties involved in the dispute. Delete Section 15.2.6. Delete Sections 15.3 and 15.4 in their entirety. END OF DOCUMENT 00 0800 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Supplementary Conditions -General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 0800-14 DOCUMENT 00 0801 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND CERTIFICATION (name of vendor/supplier/contractor/sub-contractor) ("Company") is providing services to the Iowa CityCommunity School District ("District") as a vendor, supplier, or contractor or is operating or managing the operations of a vendor, supplier or contractor. The services provided by the Company may involve the presence of the Company’s employees upon the real property of the schools of the District. The Company acknowledges that Iowa law prohibits a sex offender who has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor from being present upon the real property of the schools of the District. The Company further acknowledges that, pursuant to law, a sex offender who has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor may not operate, manage, be employed by, or act as a contractor, vendor or supplier of services or volunteer at the schools of the District. The Company hereby certifies that no one who is an owner, operator or manager of the Company has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor. The Company further agrees that it shall not permit any person who is a sex offender convicted of a sex offense against a minor to provide any services to the District in accordance with the prohibitions set forth above. This Acknowledgment and Certification is to be construed under the laws of the State of Iowa. If any portion hereof is held invalid, the balance of the document shall, notwithstanding, continue in full legal force and effect. In signing this Acknowledgment and Certification, the person signing on behalf of the Company hereby acknowledges that he/she has read this entire document, that he/she understands its terms, and that he/she not only has the authority to sign the document on behalf of the Company, but has signed it knowingly and voluntarily. Dated:______________________ (name of vendor/supplier/contractor/sub-contractor) By: ___________________________________ Printed Name: ___________________________________ Title: ___________________________________ END OF DOCUMENT 00 0801 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Acknowledgement and Certification 000801-1 Division 01 General Requirements 01 Division SECTION 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Project Description. B.Work by Owner. C.Contractor use of site and premises. D.Work sequence. E.Owner occupancy. 1.2PROJECT DESCRIPTION A.General Project Description: Upgrades to the HVAC systems that serves the cafeteria and kitchen for the purpose of improving humidity control which will include general construction and electrical work. 1.The Contractor shall plan, schedule and coordinate his operations in a manner that will facilitate the simultaneous progress of the Work under the various Sections of this Contract. 2.The Work shall be coordinated with the Owner to minimize interference with operation of the regular school activities. B.Schedule 1.Contractor shall schedule and hold regular progress meetings at least bi-weekly and at other times as requested by the Architect/Engineer or required by progress of the Work. Contractor, Architect/Engineer, and all major subcontractors active on thesite shall be represented at each meeting. Contractor may at his discretion or at the request of the Architect/Engineer have representatives of suppliers, manufacturers and other subcontractors attend meetings. 2.Contractor shall preside at the meetingsand provide for keeping and distribution of minutes. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Work, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in schedule and resolve other problems that may arise. C.Land for Construction Purposes 1.Contractor will be permitted to use available land belonging to the Owner, on or near the site of the Work, for construction purposes and for the storage of materials and equipment. The location and extent of the areas availableto the Contractor shall be as indicated on the Drawings. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Summary of Work 011100-1 SECTION 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK D.Notices 1.Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent properties and utilities when execution of the Work may affect them. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access by owners or tenants to their property, or when any utility service connection must be interrupted, the Contractor shall give notices sufficiently in advance to enable the affected persons to provide for their needs. 2.Notices, whether given orally or in writing, shall include appropriate information concerning the interruption and instruction on how to limit their inconvenience. 1.3WORK BY OWNER A.The Owner will provide asbestos abatement as needed, as deemed by the Contractor to be suspect and subsequently testing positive as ACM. B.The Owner willpurchase the hot water reheat coils to be installed by the contractor. 1.4CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A.The District has a strict year-round no smoking policy for all persons on school property. B.Contractor shall follow building security sign-in and identification procedures. C.Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1.Owner occupancy. 2.Work by Others and Work by Owner. 3.Use of site and premises by the public. D.Contractor access to the building shall be limited to periods in which District personnel are in attendance, per the following schedule: 1.Regular summer hours for custodial staff are 6:30 a.m. through 5:30 p.m. and may be extended to 11:00 p.m. The District will consider weekend access only after full use of available weekday hours is exhausted. 1.5WORK SEQUENCE A.Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. B.The work shall be accomplished according to the following schedule: All work onsite may commence on or around July 1, 2013. All work shall be substantially complete by March 21, 2014. C.The following general phasing requirement shall be as followed: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Summary of Work 011100-2 SECTION 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.Work to be completed by August 9, 2013 shall include the installation of gas piping above the cafeteria ceiling, the installation of the new reheat coils within the existing air handlers, and the replacement of the domestic water heaters and associated storage tank and related accessories. 2.The new boilers, pumps, and reheat coils shall be made operational by October 1, 2013. Coordinate with school activities when performing work in the period between August 9 and October 1. The Cafeteria will be utilized during this period. The downtime of the cafeteria/HVAC system shall be limited to two days in order to make final tie-ins and final conversion to the new DDC controls. 3.Work to be performedover spring break 2014 (March 17-21) shall include all ceiling and lighting modifications in the cafeteria and kitchen. Also, if weather conditions do not allow for the final controls checkout of the reheat sequence of operation in fall 2013, this checkout shall occur over spring break of 2014. 4.The Owner reserves the right to alter the phasing/sequence of the schedule for either the Contractor's or Owner's benefit. The Owner may consider written or graphic Contractor proposed modifications of the schedule provided the format of the request is acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. The Owner, however, is under no obligation to authorize a deviation from the schedule. 1.6OWNER OCCUPANCY A.The Owner will occupy the premises during the entire period of construction. B.Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. C.Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. D.The Contractor shall comply with the building's sign-in and security procedures. END OF SECTION 01 1100 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Summary of Work 011100-3 SECTION 01 1100.10 SHUT DOWN / TIE IN PROCEDURES FOR OUTSIDE CONTRACTORS IOWACITYCOMMUNITYSCHOOL DISTRICT SUPPORTSERVICES FacilitiesManagement1137S.RiversideDrive Duane Van Hemert,DirectorofPhysical PlantIowa City, Iowa 52246 319-688-1020Phone 319-688-1029Fax Whenplanningatie-intoanyexistingmechanical, plumbing, electricalequipmentorpiping,pleaseadhereto thefollowinginorder tominimizedisruptiontothedistrict. 1.NotifythegeneralcontractorandtheICCSD construction manager, 688-1020,ofyourintentions along withasuggested dateandtimetoperformthework. 2.Includeawrittenplanforexecutingthejob listinganysafety requirements neededtoperform shutdownortiein.Examples would belock outtagout, powershutdown,boilershutdown, watershutdown,PPE,confinedspace,etc. 3.Confirm withthegeneralandICCSD byhavingthemsignoffyourplan givingpriorapproval that thedate andtimeisacceptable. 4.FollowallOSHAguidelinesforanyworkperformedatICCSD. ICCSD withacopyof their 5.Forworkinaconfinedspacethecontractormust providethe confinedspaceprogramand documentationoftrainingforanyone involvedintheconfined spacebeforeentrytakes place. Contractorwillbetotallyresponsibleforallrequirementsconcerning confinedspace entries. ICCSD isnotresponsibleforthecontractor'ssafetyprogramorworkperformed bycontractors. Adhering tothispolicyonly approvesthecontractor’sdatesandtimestotieinto district property. IncaseofanaccidentoremergencycallICCSDaftercallingany emergencyserviceneeded.Callinorder untilsomeoneis reached. Duane Van HemertOffice:688-1020Cell:564-9070 DaveMcKenzieOffice688-1020Cell631-0801 Central Office688-1000 END OF SECTION 01 1100.10 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Shut Down/Tie in Procedures for Outside Contractors 01 1100.10-1 SECTION 011520 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Temporary Utilities: Electrical (etc.), ventilation and sanitary facilities. B.Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and protection of the Work. 1.2TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.Contractor(s) may utilize Owner's utilities as required, including but not limited to electrical for normal job operations. 1.3TEMPORARY VENTILATION A.Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Areas in which welding, torch-cutting, concrete cutting, coring, jack-hammering etc. is being conducted shall be provided with positive ventilation to the exterior. B.Supply equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.4TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A.Existing facilities within building may be used during interior construction operations. 1.5EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A.Provide temporary (and insulated if occupied areas are open during heating season) weather-tight closure of exterior openingsto accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. B.Provide temporary weather-tight roofing as indicated. 1.6PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A.Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B.Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C.Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D.Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. E.Prohibit traffic over landscaped areas. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Construction Facilities 011520-1 SECTION 011520 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 1.7PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A.Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B.Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C.Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D.Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site daily. 1.8REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A.Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B.Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C.Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 011520 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Construction Facilities 011520-2 SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.2DEFINITIONS A.Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1.Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a.Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b.Submittals Schedule. c.Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven daysbefore the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B.Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1.Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a.Project name and location. b.Name of Architect. c.Architect's project number. d.Contractor's name and address. e.Date of submittal. 2.Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a.Related Specification Section or Division. b.Description of the Work. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Payment Procedures 01 2900-1 SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES c.Name of subcontractor. d.Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e.Name of supplier. f.Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g.Dollar value. 1)Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3.Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4.Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5.Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a.Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 6.Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7.Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a.Temporary facilitiesand other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 1.4APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A.Each Applicationfor Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1.Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B.Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C.Payment Application Forms: Use AIADocumentG702 and AIADocumentG703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Payment Procedures 01 2900-2 SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES D.Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architectwill return incomplete applications without action. 1.Entries shall match data on the Schedule ofValues and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2.Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 3.Prior to submitting notarized copies for execution of payment application, provide a preliminary application with schedule of values for review. Once satisfactory to Owner/Architect, proceed with formal submittal of notarized copies. E.Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architectby a method ensuring receiptwithin 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1.Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F.Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1.List of subcontractors. 2.Schedule of Values. 3.Contractor's Construction Schedule reviewed and approved by Owner. Application will not be processed until approved by Owner. 4.Products list. 5.Schedule of unit prices. 6.Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7.List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8.List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9.Copies of building permits. 10.Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11.Initial progress report. 12.Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 13.Performance and payment bonds. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Payment Procedures 01 2900-3 SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 14.Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. G.Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1.Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2.This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H.Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1.Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2.Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3.Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4.AIADocumentG706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5.AIADocumentG706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6.AIADocumentG707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7.Evidence that claims have been settled. 8.Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9.Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. 10.Certificate of Occupancy, if required. END OF SECTION012900 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Payment Procedures 01 2900-4 SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Coordination. B.Preconstruction Meeting C.Progress Meetings. D.Pre-installation Meetings. 1.2COORDINATION A.Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of the Contract Documents to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B.Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operatingequipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C.Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D.In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E.Coordinate completionand clean up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. F.After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.3PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A.Architect/Engineer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B.Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractors. C.Agenda: 1.Distribution of Contract Documents. 2.Requirements and schedule for Contractor's submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, project schedule, bonds and insurance certificates. 3.Designation of responsible personnel representing the Owner, the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Project Management and Coordination 013100-1 SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 4.Review construction schedule: Official contract start date Substantial completion deadline Final completion deadline Critical dates during Construction Equipment deliveries and priorities Critical Work sequencing 5.Procedures and processing of: Field decisions Shop Drawings Product Data Samples Substitutions Applications for payment Construction change directive Change Orders Contract close out 6.Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 7.Requirements and procedures for testing. 8.Safety. 9.Security. 10.Contractor's field office. 11.Housekeeping. 12.Working hours. 13.Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 14.Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 15.Procedures for maintaining record documents. 16.Requirements for start-up of equipment. 17.Review and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Project Management and Coordination 013100-2 SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 18.Other items of discussion. 1.4PROGRESS MEETINGS A.Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum monthly intervals. B.Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants,preside at meetings. C.Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.D.Agenda: 1.Review minutes of previous meetings. 2.Review of Work progress. 3.Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4.Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5.Review of submittals schedule andstatus of submittals. 6.Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7.Maintenance of progress schedule. 8.Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9.Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10.Coordination of projected progress. 11.Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12.Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13.Other business relating to work. E.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to the Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.5PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the section. B.Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C.Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date. D.Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Project Management and Coordination 013100-3 SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2.Review coordination with related work. 3.Review existing building conditions on the exterior and interior. E.Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants, with 2 copies to Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 013100 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Project Management and Coordination 013100-4 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2DEFINITIONS A.Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect/Engineer'sresponsive action. B.Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect/Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.General: When requested, an electronic floor plan(s) will be provided for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings willnot be provided for Contractor's use. B.Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1.Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2.Each trade having involvement with other trades'materials and/or equipment shall cross- review and approve, compliant with this Section's 3.01 Contractor's Review. Specifically, electrical and temperature controls'subcontractors shall review and approve mechanical submittals, where either subcontractor has responsibility in the equipment's installation or overall operation. 3.Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a.Architect/Engineerreservesthe right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittalsand/or trades,until related submittals are received. C.Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation"for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D.Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence onArchitect/Engineer's receiptof submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-1 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.Initial Review: Allow 15days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect/Engineerwill advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2.Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3.Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 daysfor review of each resubmittal. 4.Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21days for initial review of each submittal. 5.Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned toArchitect/Engineerbefore being returned to Contractor. E.Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1.Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2.Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect/Engineer. 3.Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a.Project name. b.Date. c.Name and address of Architect/Engineer. d.Name and address of Contractor. e.Name and address of subcontractor. f.Name and address of supplier. g.Name of manufacturer. h.Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1)Submittal number shall use Specification Section numberfollowed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). i.Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-2 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES k.Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l.Other necessary identification. F.Deviations: Encircle or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.Lack of this identification shall be cause for rejection of submittal. G.Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect/Engineer observesnoncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1.Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect/Engineer. 2.Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals willbe marked withaction taken and will be returned. H.Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal by Section, using a separate transmittal form. Architect/Engineer willreturn submittals, without review,received from sources other than Contractor. 1.Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a.Project name. b.Date. c.Destination (To:). d.Source (From:). e.Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f.Category and type of submittal. g.Submittal purpose and description. h.Specification Section number and title. i.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j.Transmittal number. k.Submittal and transmittal distribution record. l.Remarks. m.Signature of transmitter. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-3 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2.On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect/Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. I.Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1.Note date and content of previous submittal. 2.Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3.Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Furnish as Submitted"or "Furnish as Corrected." J.Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K.Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating Furnish as Submitted OR Furnish as Correctedtaken by Architect/Engineer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1ACTION SUBMITTALS A.General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1.Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project. B.Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1.If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2.Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3.Include the following information, as applicable: a.Manufacturer's written recommendations. b.Manufacturer's product specifications. c.Manufacturer's installation instructions. d.Standard color charts. e.Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f.Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g.Printed performance curves. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-4 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES h.Operational range diagrams. i.Mill reports. j.Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k.Compliance with specified referenced standards. l.Testing by recognized testing agency. m.Application of testing agency labels and seals. n.Notation of coordination requirements. 4.Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5.Number of Copies: Submit four copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect/Engineerwill return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C.Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1.Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a.Dimensions. b.Identification of products. c.Fabrication and installation drawings. d.Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e.Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f.Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g.Templates and patterns. h.Schedules. i.Design calculations. j.Compliance with specified standards. k.Notation of coordination requirements. l.Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-5 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES m.Relationshipto adjoining construction clearly indicated. n.Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o.Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2.Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least8-1/2 by 11 inchesbut no larger than 30 by 42inches. 3.Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect/Engineer will return one copy. 4.Number of Copies: Submit fouropaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit fourcopies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect/Engineer will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. D.Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1.Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2.Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a.Generic description of Sample. b.Product name and name of manufacturer. c.Sample source. d.Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3.Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a.Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b.Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4.Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-6 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES a.Number of Samples: Submit twofull set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect/Engineer will return submittal with options selected. 5.Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a.Number of Samples: Submit threesetsof Samples. Architect/Engineer will retain twoSample sets; remainder will be returned. 1)Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2)If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least threesetsof paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E.Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1.Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2.Number and name of room or space. 3.Location within room or space. 4.Number of Copies: Submit fourcopies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect/Engineer will return two copies. a.Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F.Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation"for Construction Manager's action. G.Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H.Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Payment Procedures." I.Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Payment Procedures." City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-7 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES J.Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1.Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2.Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4.Number of Copies: Submit fourcopies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect/Engineer will return two copies. a.Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1.Number of Copies: Submit one copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect/Engineer will not return copies. 2.Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statementthat includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3.Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Quality Requirements." B.Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C.Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D.Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E.Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F.Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-8 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES G.Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H.Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I.Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J.Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K.Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L.Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1.Name of evaluation organization. 2.Date of evaluation. 3.Time period when report is in effect. 4.Product and manufacturers'names. 5.Description of product. 6.Test procedures and results. 7.Limitations of use. M.Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Quality Requirements." N.Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. O.Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-9 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES P.Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q.Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." R.Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, andcalculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. S.Manufacturer'sInstructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1.Preparation of substrates. 2.Required substrate tolerances. 3.Sequence of installation or erection. 4.Required installation tolerances. 5.Required adjustments. 6.Recommendations for cleaning and protection. T.Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1.Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2.Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3.Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4.Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5.Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6.Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-10 SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 7.Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. U.Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. V.Construction Photographs:Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section " Photographic Documentation." W.Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect/Engineer. 1.Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A.Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect/Engineer. B.Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'SACTION A.General: Architect/Engineerwill not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B.Action Submittals: Architect/Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modificationsrequired, and return it. Architect/Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1."Furnish as Submitted,""Furnish as Corrected,""Revise and Resubmit,""Incomplete"or "Rejected." C.Informational Submittals: Architect/Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect/Engineer will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D.Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review. E.Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION013300 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Submittal Procedures 01 3300-11 SECTION 013510 REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Perform remodeling construction as indicated on the Drawings and as herein specified. B.Coordinate work of employees and subcontractors. C.Schedule elements of remodeling and renovation work to expedite completion. D.Schedule noisy or hazardous work to avoid problems with Owner's operations. E.In addition to demolition specified in individual Specification Sections, and shown on drawings, cut, move or remove existing construction to provide access or to allow remodelingand new work to proceed. F.Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new construction. 1.2SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES A.Submit separate detailed sub-schedule for alteration work, coordinated with Construction Schedule. Show: 1.Each stage of work; occupancy dates of area. 2.Date of Substantial Completion for each area of alteration work. 3.Crafts and subcontractors employed in each area. 1.3ALTERATIONS, CUTTINGAND PROTECTION A.Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or metals, by methods to terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division. B.Protect existing and new work from weather and temperature extremes. 1.Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F. 2.Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control to prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work. C.Provide exterior and/or interior temporary enclosures specified in Section 015000,Temporary Facilities and Controls. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES, to separate work areas from existing building and from areas occupied by the Owner, and to provide weather protection. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Remodeling Project Procedures 013510-1 SECTION 013510 REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1SALVAGED MATERIALS A.Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed materials to replace damaged work of existing construction, when material is not readily obtainable on current market. 1.Use particular care in removal and salvage of Brick. 2.Store salvaged items in a dry, secure place on site. 3.Items not specified for use in repair work remain the Owner's property. 4.Do not use salvaged or used material in new construction except with prior written authorization from Architect/Engineer or as indicated in drawings. 2.2MATERIALS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING A.Ensure that work is complete: 1.Provide same materials or types of construction as that in existing structure, to patch, extend or match existing work. a.Contract Documents may not define products or standards of workmanship present in existing construction. b.Determine products by inspection and testing. c.Determine workmanship by use of existing as sample of comparison. 2.Presence of a product, finish or type of construction requires that patching, extending or matching be performed to make work complete and consistent to identical quality standards. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1REMOVE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. A.Remove existing construction as required to complete the new construction work as shown and detailed on the drawings and as specified. 3.2PERFORMANCE. A.Patch and extend existing work using skilled craftsman capable of matching existing quality of workmanship. B.For patched or extended work, provide quality equivalent to that specified for new work. 3.3DAMAGED SURFACES A.Patch and replace all portions of existing finished surfaces found to be damaged, lifted, discolored or showing other imperfections, with matching material. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Remodeling Project Procedures 013510-2 SECTION 013510 REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES 1.Provide adequate support prior to patching the finish. 2.Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce uniform color and texture over entire surface. 3.When existing surface cannot be matched, contact Owner and Architect/Engineer for alternative course of action prior to commencing work in area under question. 3.4TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK A.When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance as closely as possible. 1.When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface in a neat manner along a straight line at a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface, as satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. B.Restore exposed finishes of patched or repaired areas, and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken portion containing the patch or repair, after the affected area has received primer and intermediate coat(s). 3.5CLEANING A.At completion of work of each craft, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive crafts. B.At completion of remodeling/alteration work in each area, provide final cleaning in accord with Section 017800, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, and leave spaces in a condition suitable for use of Owner. END OF SECTION 013510 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Remodeling Project Procedures 013510-3 SECTION 01 6100 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Products. B.Transportation and Handling. C.Storage and Protection. D.Product Selection. E.Product Options. F.Substitutions. 1.2PRODUCTS A.Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B.Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C.Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for components being replaced. 1.3TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A.Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged. C.Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.4STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact andlegible. B.Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures. C.Fabricated products, requiring exterior storage, shall be placed on sloped supports, above ground. D.Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. E.Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Product Requirements 01 6100-1 SECTION 01 6100 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS F.Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G.Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H.Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodicallyinspect to verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 1.5PRODUCT SELECTION A.Provide products that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise noted, unused at the time ofinstallation. B.Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for the installation and for the intended use and effect. C.Standard Products: Provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar conditions on other projects. D.Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, or where "No substitution" is indicated, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. E.Semi-Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. F.Where products are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or approved equivalent", comply with provisions for "Substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. G.Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, listing characteristics required, without use of a brand name, furnish a product that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with requirements. H.Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications stipulate compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply and are recommended for the application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in product literature, or by certification of performance. I.Visual Selection: Where requirements include the phrase "... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, provide a product that complies with designated requirements. The Architect/Engineer will select color, pattern, and texture from the approved product line. J.Compliance with Standards: Where Specifications require compliance with a standard, select a product that complies with the standard specified. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Product Requirements 01 6100-2 SECTION 01 6100 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS K.Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching a sample, the Architect/Engineer'sdecision on whether a proposed product matches will be final. Where no product matches and complies with other requirements, comply with provisions for "Product Substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another category. 1.6PRODUCT OPTIONS A.Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product meeting those standards or description. B.Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C.Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7SUBSTITUTIONS A.Request for substitutionsshall be governed by applicable provisions of the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions, in accordance with the stipulations specified governing Product Selection, and as specified. B.Request for changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of construction required by Contract Documents, proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract, are considered requests for "Substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: C.Substitutions requested by bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. D.Revisions to Contract Documents request by the Owner or Architect/Engineer. E.Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. F.The Contractor's compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. G.Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 30 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer. H.Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit request in the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals. I.Provide data including the product description, specifications,drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request (including applicable UL and FM approval data) and identify the applicable portions of such data. Include related Project Specification Sections and Drawing numbers. Provide documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate and applicable: J.Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Product Requirements 01 6100-3 SECTION 01 6100 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS K.Request is timely, documented and properly submitted. L.Request is directly related to an "or approved equivalent" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. M.Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the specified product or method cannot be provided because of the Contractor's failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. N.Specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. O.A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect/Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. P.Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. Q.Specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. R.Specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents, and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution will provide the required warranty. S.The Contractor's submittal and Architect/Engineer's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not, of themselves, constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, and the Architect/Engineer's action does not constitute approval of a substitution not otherwise properly requested. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 016100 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Product Requirements 01 6100-4 SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 1.2QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B.Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety-related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or results in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. C.Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect/Engineer's judgment, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities or result in visual evidence of cutting or patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIALS A.Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will be equivalent to or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSPECTION A.Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 3.2PREPARATION A.Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B.Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C.Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas of interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D.Take precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. Lucas Elementary School Restrooms Remodel 111181-0 Cutting and Patching 017329-1 SECTION 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.3PERFORMANCE A.General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. B.Cut existing construction only where required to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities, and perform the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. C.Cut masonry and concrete with water cooled, diamond blade machines. Dust must be kept at a minimum. Block off all passages of dust migration in area where working. Provide separate means of exhausting air from area using temporary ductwork and powered fans. Contain slurry during cutting operations and protect finished surfaces from stains. Remove slurry immediately and wash surfaces after cutting operations are complete. D.Execute cutting, fitting and patching to complete Work, and to: 1.Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2.Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. E.Execute Work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. F.Restore Work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G.Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H.Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; seal voids. I.Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect/Engineer for decision or remedy. J.Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. K.Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken portion containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat. 3.4CLEANING A.Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Clean exposed piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 017329 Lucas Elementary School Restrooms Remodel 111181-0 Cutting and Patching 017329-2 SECTION 017500 STARTING AND ADJUSTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Starting Systems. B.Demonstration and Instructions. C.Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.2STARTING SYSTEMS A.Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B.Notify Architect/Engineer7 days prior to start-up of each item. C.Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions which may cause damage. D.Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E.Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F.Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G.When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 1.3DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A.Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B.Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C.Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at designated location. D.Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. E.The amount of time required for instructions on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Starting and Adjusting 017500-1 SECTION 017500 STARTING AND ADJUSTING PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 017500 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Starting and Adjusting 017500-2 SECTION 01 7700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Project closeout procedures. B.Substantial completion. C.Final acceptance. 1.2PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.Project closeout includes the following activities: 1.Substantial Completion: Preparation for request of the Substantial Completion inspection, the inspection, and issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 2.Final Acceptance: Preparation for request of the Final Inspection, the final inspection, and issuance of the Notice of Acceptance. B.Substantial Completion may be for the entire project or, when approved by the Owner, for individual parts of the project that are substantially complete at different dates. 1.3SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A.Prior to requesting Owner's Substantial Completion inspection, complete the following and list known exceptions in request: 1.List incomplete work, value of incomplete work, and reasons for being incomplete for inclusion in "Certificate of Substantial Completion." 2.Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 3.Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, agreements, final certifications and similar documents. See Section 013300-Submittals. 4.Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner. 5.Complete final cleaning. B.Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following the inspection, the Owner will either prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate, and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch list" for final acceptance. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Contract Closeout 01 7700-1 SECTION 01 7700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.4FINAL ACCEPTANCE A.Prior to requesting Owner's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as required by General Conditions, complete the following: 1.Submit final payment request. 2.Submit copy of Owner's final punch list of work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3.Submit project record documents, specified warranties, and operation and maintenance data, as required by specific Specifications Sections. 4.Submit proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid. Submit Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance "Contractor's Statement" (Form 35-002) for sales tax refund. 5.Submitproof to the Owner that all keys borrowed during the course of the project have been returned. 6.Submit TSB Payment, if applicable. 7.Submit release from the Iowa Department of Revenue if the Contractor is not a resident of the State of Iowa. B.Final Inspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, including punch list resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Owner will perform the Final Inspection. Upon completion of the Final Inspection, Owner will either prepare Certificate of Final Acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated. C.Re-inspection Costs: Should the Owner be required to perform additional Final Inspections because of failure of work to comply with original certifications of Contractor, Contractor will compensate Owner for additional services and deduct amount paid from final payment to Contractor. PART 2PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 017700 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Contract Closeout 01 7700-2 SECTION 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Final Completion and Closeout Procedures. B.Final Cleaning. C.Adjusting. D.Project Record Documents. E.Operation and Maintenance Data. F.Warranties. G.Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 1.2FINAL COMPLETION ANDCLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's review. B.Provide submittals to Architect/Engineerthat are required by governing or other authorities. C.Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. Along with or prior to the submittal of the final Application for Payment submit the documents required in Section 011290-Payment Procedures. D.Refer to Section 01 3300 for electronic submittal procedures. 1.3FINAL CLEANING A.Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B.Clean equipment and fixtures with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. C.Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. D.Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. E.Remove project identification and signs, waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 1.4ADJUSTING A.Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Closeout Submittals 017800-1 SECTION 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.5PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1.Drawings. 2.Specifications. 3.Addenda. 4.Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract Documents. 5.Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6.Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B.Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C.Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D.Record information concurrent with construction progress. E.Specifications: Legibly mark and recordat each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1.Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2.Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3.Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F.Record Documents and ShopDrawings: Clearly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1.Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2.Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3.Field changes of dimension and detail. 4.Details not on original Contract drawings. G.Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claims for final Application for Payment. 1.6OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A.Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Closeout Submittals 017800-2 SECTION 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS B.Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project. C.Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D.Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product orsystem description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1.Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2.Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a.Significant design criteria. b.List of equipment. c.Parts list for each component. d.Operating instructions. e.Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f.Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3.Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a.Shop drawings and product data. b.Air and water balance reports. c.Certificates. d.Photocopies of warranties. 4.Submit one draft copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of all documents as required prior to final submission. 5.Submit (2) sets of revised final volumes, within 20 days after finalinspection unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Closeout Submittals 017800-3 SECTION 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.7WARRANTIES A.Provide notarized copies. B.Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C.Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ringbinder with durable plastic cover. D.Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E.For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing date of acceptanceas start of warranty period. 1.8SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B.Deliver to location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 017800 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Closeout Submittals 017800-4 SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Storing record documents. B.Quality assurance. C.Recording changes in contract drawings. D.Recording changes in project manual. E.Recording changes in shop drawings and product data. F.Product sample submittal. 1.2STORING RECORD DOCUMENTS A.Following award of Contract, promptly secure from Architect, at no charge to Contractor, one complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract for recording of changes during construction. These documents shall not be used for construction purposes. B.Maintain one copy of the following at the project site: 1.Contract Drawings. 2.Project Manual. 3.Addenda. 4.Approved Shop Drawings, product data and product samples. 5.Request for Information (RFI). 6.Construction Change Directive (CCD). 7.Change Orders. C.Documents shall be available at all times for inspection by Architect/Engineer and Owner. 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Delegate the responsibility of maintenance of record documents to one person on the Contractor's staff. B.Accuracy of Records: 1.Thoroughly coordinate changes within the record documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of the Specifications and each sheet of the Drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Project Record Documents 01 7839-1 SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2.Accuracy of records shall be such that future searchesfor items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. C.Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 1.4RECORDING CHANGES IN CONTRACT DRAWINGS A.Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in 2-inch high letters printed in red ink. B.Keep record documents current. Legibly mark to record actual construction. C.Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. 1.Document the location of all valves installed outsideof a building. a.The valve may be located by swing ties from easily identifiable and relatively permanent points on campus. Building corners are the preferred points, but light poles and street and sidewalk intersections are acceptable if building corners are not close or easily accessible. b.The valve(s) may also be located by use of north and east coordinates. These coordinates shall be based on the Iowa State Plane Coordinate System (South Zone) NAD27. D.Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. E.Date all entries. F.Call attention to the entry by drawing a "cloud" around the area. G.Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing "field" condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. H.Document new information which is recognized to be of importance to the Owner, but was for some reason not shown on either Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. I.Note related RFI or AIA Documents numbers where applicable. 1.5RECORDING CHANGES IN PROJECT MANUAL A.Label Project Manual "PROJECT RECORD" in 2-inch high letters printed in red ink. B.Keep record documents current. Legibly mark to record actual construction. C.Mark changes with red erasable pencil. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Project Record Documents 01 7839-2 SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS D.In each Section, indicate manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. E.Record changes made by RFI or AIA Documents. 1.6RECORDING CHANGES IN SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A.Document work that varies from approved submittals. B.Document variations in products as delivered to site and variations from manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. C.Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. D.Note related RFIs and AIA Documents and changes to Record Drawings and Specifications. 1.7PRODUCT SAMPLE SUBMITTAL A.Immediately prior to date(s) of Substantial Completion, Owner will meet with Contractor at site and determine which submitted samples are to be transmitted to Owner for record purposes. B.Comply with Owner's instructions for packaging, identification marking (including supplier, manufacturer, pattern, style, color and finish), and delivery to Owner's sample storage space. PART 2PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 017839 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Project Record Documents 01 7839-3 Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 Division SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Firestopping systems. B.Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies , whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.2REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM E814 -Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2011a. B.ITS (DIR) -Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. C.FM 4991 -Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2001. D.FM P7825 -Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition. E.SCAQMD 1168 -South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. F.UL (FRD) -Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3300-Submittal Procedures. B.Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C.Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics and performance ratings. D.Qualification statements for installing mechanics. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduledfire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1.Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey)will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum threeyears documentedexperience. C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1.Approved by Factory MutualResearch under FM Standard 4991, Approval of Firestop Contractors . City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Firestopping 07 8400-1 SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING 1.5FIELD CONDITIONS A.Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3days after installation of materials. B.Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A.Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1.Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by ULortested in accordance with ASTM E814that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating Equal to F Ratingand that meets all other specified requirements. 2.2MATERIALS A.Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B.Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Singlecomponent silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant; conforming to the following: 1.Elongation:500percent. 2.Manufacturers: a.3M Fire Protection Products; Product Fire Barrier Silicone Sealant 2000+: www.3m.com/firestop. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. C.Fibered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers; conforming to the following: 1.Density: 4 PCF lb/cu ft. 2.Manufacturers: a.3M Fire Protection Products; Product Fire Barrier Packing Material PM4. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. D.Fiber Firestopping: Mineralfiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer forming airtight bond to opening; conforming to the following: 1.Manufacturers: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Firestopping 07 8400-2 SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING a.A/DFire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b.PecoraCorporation: www.pecora.com. c.Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. E.Firestop Devices -Wrap Type: Mechanical device with incombustiblefiller and sheet stainless steel jacket, intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed; conforming to the following: 1.Manufacturers: a.3M Fire Protection Products; Product FS-195+: www.3m.com/firestop. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. F.Firestop Devices -SheetType: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and sheet stainless steel jacket, intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed; conforming to the following: 1.Manufacturers: a.3M Fire Protection Products;Product CS-195+: www.3m.com/firestop. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. G.Intumescent Putty: Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain; conforming to the following: 1.Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2.Color: Black, dark gray, or red. 3.Manufacturers: a.3M Fire Protection Products; Product Fire Barrier Sealant CP 25WB+: www.3m.com/firestop. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. H.Intumescent Putty: Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain; conforming to the following: 1.Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2.Color: Black, dark gray, or red. 3.Manufacturers: a.3M Fire Protection Products; Product Fire Barrier Moldable Putty: www.3m.com/firestop. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Firestopping 07 8400-3 SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. I.Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.2PREPARATION A.Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B.Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C.Install backingmaterials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.3INSTALLATION A.Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B.Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction. C.Install labeling required by code. 3.4CLEANING A.Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.5PROTECTION A.Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OFSECTION07 8400 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Firestopping 07 8400-4 SECTION 07 9005 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Sealants and joint backing. 1.2REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C834 -Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. B.ASTM C919 -Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2008. C.ASTM C920-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. D.ASTM C1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009. E.SCAQMD 1168 -South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.3ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3300-Submittal Procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, substrate preparation, and color availability. C.Samples: Submit twosamples, 2 inchin size illustrating sealant colors for selection. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer. 1.7FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.8WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Correct defective work within a fiveyear period after Date of Substantial Completion. C.Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Joint Sealers 07 9005-1 SECTION 07 9005 JOINT SEALERS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1SEALANTS A.Sealants and Primers -General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B.Type 1 -General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1.Color: To be selected by Architectfrom manufacturer's fullrange. 2.Product: Tremflex 834manufactured by Tremco. G.Type 2-Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses NT, A, G, M, O;single component, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding. 1.Color: To be selected by Architectfrom manufacturer's fullrange. 2.Product: Spectrum 2manufactured by Tremco. 3.Product: Spectrum 3 manufactured by Tremco. 2.2ACCESSORIES A.Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturerto suit application. B.Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C.Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30to 50percent larger than joint width. D.Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify that substrate surfacesare ready to receive work. B.Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.2PREPARATION A.Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B.Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C.Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Joint Sealers 07 9005-2 SECTION 07 9005 JOINT SEALERS D.Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.3INSTALLATION A.Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B.Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C.Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. D.Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E.Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F.Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G.Tool joints concave. 3.4CLEANING A.Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.5PROTECTION A.Protect sealants until cured. 3.6SCHEDULE A.Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated:Type 2. D.Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type 1. END OF SECTION07 9005 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Joint Sealers 07 9005-3 Division 09 Finishes 09 Division SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B.Metal stud wall framing. G.Gypsum wallboard. H.Joint treatment and accessories. 1.2RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 9000-Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant. 1.3REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C475/C475M -Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). B.ASTM C645 -Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2009a. C.ASTM C665 -Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006. D.ASTM C754 -Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2009a. E.ASTM C840 -Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2008. F.ASTM C954 -Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2010. G.ASTM C1002 -Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007. H.ASTM C1047 -Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2010a. I.ASTM C1396/C1396M -Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2009a. J.ASTM C1629/C1629 -Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant NondecoratedInterior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels; 2006. K.ASTM D3273 -Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000 (Reapproved 2005). L.ASTM E90 -Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2116-1 SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES N.GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010. P.UL (FRD) -Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3300-Submittal Procedures. D.Product Data: Provide data ongypsum boar. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing type of work, with minimum5 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A.Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. B.Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies as indicate on the Drawings and as follows: 1.UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2.2METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A.Manufacturers -Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1.Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC;www.clarkdietrich.com. 2.Marino: www.marinoware.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. B.Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1.Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with flat for formedwebs; 20 gauge. 2.Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. D.Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with deep leg deflection track with 2" deep flanges typical (unless noted otherwise) for friction fit of studs cut short. 2.4BOARD MATERIALS A.Manufacturers -Gypsum-Based Board: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2116-2 SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1.National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 2.USG Corporation: www.usg.com. C.Abuse ResistantWallboard: Tested to Level 3 soft-body and hard-body impact in accordance with ASTM C1629. 1.Application: Vertical locations unless noted otherwise. 2.Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3.Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M. 4.Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M. 5.Type: Fire-resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed. 6.Thickness: 5/8 inch. 7.Edges: Tapered. 8.Products: a.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-AbuseBrand XP Wallboard. b.USG Corporation; SHEETROCKBrand Panels--Abuse-Resistant. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. 2.5ACCESSORIES A.Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. B.Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9000. C.Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2.Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner-bead and control joints, provide U-bead and LC-beadat exposed panel edges. 3.Manufacturers -Finishing Accessories: a.Same manufacturer as framing materials. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6100-Product Requirements. D.Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2116-3 SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1.Tape: 2 inchwide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2.Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. E.High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish. F.Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inchIn Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. 1.Size and type as required by product manufacturer. G.Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inchin Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to steel studs. 1.Size and type as required by product manufacturer. I.Anchors for Attachment to Concrete MasonryUnits: Anchors 2 1/4 inches minimum length, size and type as required by product manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.2FRAMING INSTALLATION A.Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. C.Studs: Space studs as indicated. 1.Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2.Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. D.Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not lessthan double studs at jambs. 3.3ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A.Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B.Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2116-4 SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3.4BOARD INSTALLATION A.Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions.Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B.Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallelto framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicularto framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from jointsof first layer. C.Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. D.Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board . E.Isolate perimeter of non-loadbearing partitions at structural abutments except floors. Trim edges with L-Bead where exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. G.Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum boardwith sealant. 3.5INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A.Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1.Not more than 30 feetapart on walls and ceilingsover 50 feetlong. B.Corner Beads: Install atexternal corners, using longest practical lengths. C.Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.6JOINT TREATMENT A.Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paperjoint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-basedjoint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-basedjoint compound. B.Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1.Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2.Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish and interior layer of double layer assemblies. 3.Level 1: Fire rated wallareas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. C.Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1.Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2116-5 SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES D.Where Level 5 finish is indicated, sprayapply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish. 3.7TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feetin any direction. END OF SECTION09 2116 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2116-6 SECTION 09 5000 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B.Acoustical units. 1.2REFERENCES A.ASTM C 635 -Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2004. B.ASTM C 636/C 636M -Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2006. C.ASTM E580/E 580M -Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 2006. D.ASTM E 1264 -Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998 (Reapproved 2005). E.UL (FRD) -Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.See Section 013300–SubmittalProcedures, for additional submittal requirements. B.Product Data: Provide data on suspension systemcomponents. C.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.4QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer. 1.5FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F and maximum humidity of40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. B.Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units. 1.6PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B.Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Acoustical Ceilings09 5000-1 SECTION 09 5000 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1.7EXTRA MATERIALS A.See Section 016000-Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B.Provide 2 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit for IowaCity Community SchoolDistrict's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.Manufacturers: 1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.-www.armstrong.com. 2.USG Corporation –www.usg.com 3.Acoustical Units -General: ASTM E 1264, Class A. 4.Units for Installation in Fire-Rated Suspension System: Listed and classified for the fire- resistive assembly the suspension system is a part of. B.Acoustical Tile Type ACT-1: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with to the following characteristics: 1.Product: a.School Zone Fine Fissured 1713Humiguard+ and BioBlock+ by Armstrong b.Radar ClimaPlus High-NRC 22111 by USG 2.Size: 24 x 24inches. 3.Thickness: 3/4inches. 4.Light Reflectance:.84-.85percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 5.NRC: 0.70, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 6.Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 7.Edge: Square 8.Surface Color: White. 9.Surface Pattern: Medium texture. 10.Suspension System: Retrofit existing 2x4 grid system into a 2x2 grid system using grid sections and accessories as required. Grid size is 15/16" and Whitein color. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Acoustical Ceilings09 5000-2 SECTION 09 5000 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS D.Acoustical Tile Type ACT-2: Vinyl faced un-perforated material fiber with Humigard Bioblock Plus antimicrobial treatment by Armstrong, with the following characteristics: 1.Product: a.Clean Room VL un-perforated 868 by Armstrong. b.Clean Room Clima Plus un-perforated 56099 by USG. 2.Size: 24 x 24inches. 3.Thickness: 5/8inches. 4.Light Reflectance:.80percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 5.Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 40, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 6.Edge: Square. 7.Surface Color: White. 8.Surface Pattern: Non-directional. 9.Suspension System: Retrofit existing 2x4 grid system intoa 2x2 grid system using grid sections and accessories as required. Grid size is 15/16" and White in color. Provide White Aluminum with prefinished aluminum capping where existing grid is aluminum. 2.2SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.Manufacturers: 1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc. -www.armstrong.com. 2.USG Corporation –www.usg.com 3.Chicago Metallic B.Suspension Systems -General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C.The existing suspension system is Chicago Metallic #511-0. Selected system for new cross tees to create 2x2 grid will need to be compatible with this system. 2.3METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A.Manufacturers: 1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.USG Interiors, Inc. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Acoustical Ceilings09 5000-3 SECTION 09 5000 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS B.Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1.For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2.5ACCESSORIES A.Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B.Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1.At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Verify existing conditions before starting work. B.Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.2INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M, ASTM E 580/E 580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B.Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C.Locate system on room axis centered on the room and according to reflected ceiling planunless otherwise noted. D.Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E.Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F.Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G.Do not support components on main runners or cross runners. H.Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of each corner, or support components independently. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Acoustical Ceilings09 5000-4 SECTION 09 5000 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS I.Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. J.Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1.Use longest practical lengths. 2.Overlap and rivet corners. 3.3INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C.Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D.Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E.Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F.Cutting Acoustical Units: 1.Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. G.Install hold-down clips on each panel in areas adjacent to exterior doors, to retain panels tight to grid system; comply with fire rating requirements. 3.4ERECTION TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). B.Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION09 5000 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Acoustical Ceilings09 5000-5 Division 22 Plumbing 22 Division SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.The work shall include the furnishings of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division and as called for on the Plumbing Drawings to include supervision, quality control, operation, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete plumbing installation. The work shall also include the furnishing of necessary hoisting facilities to setmaterials and equipment in place and the furnishing of any scaffolding and transportation associated with this work. B.Examine the project site and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect the work. Review the drawings and specifications of other trades and take note of conditions to be created which will affect the work. All conditions shall be considered in the preparation of bids; no additional compensation will be made on the behalf of this Contractor. C.Provide labor necessary to demolish the existingplumbing system as shown on the drawings, as described in Part 3, Existing Conditions, or as required. D.Where noted on the drawings or where called for in other sections of the specification, the Contractor for this division shall install equipment furnished by others, and shall make required service connections. Verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. This contractor shall be responsible for the removal and installation of railings, piping, etc. as required to install new equipment. 1.2DAMAGE A.The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the work of other trades, or to the building and its contents, caused by equipment installation. 1.3PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A.Obtain and furnish necessary permits and inspection certificates for material and labor furnished. Permits and certificates shall be obtained from the proper inspection authorities. The cost of permits, certificates and fees required in connection with the installation shall be borne by the Contractor, unless otherwise noted in the detailed contractual description preceding these specifications. Where applications are required for the procuring of utility services to the building, see that such application is properly filed with the utility, and that information required for such an application is presented to the extent and in the form required by the utility company. 1.4CODES AND STANDARDS A.Applicable provisions of the following codes and standards are hereby imposed on a general basis for the plumbing work (in addition to specific applications specified by individual work sections of these specifications): ASHRAE/IES 90.1 -Code for Energy Efficiency ANSI Pressure Piping Standards (B31) ASHRAE Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI B9.1) AWWA Standards City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-1 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and State Boiler Code AWS Standards for Welding National Electrical Code Local and/or State Plumbing, Mechanical and Building Codes Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) International Plumbing Code International Mechanical Code NFPA Standards and Pamphlets International Energy Conservation Code B.If any work indicated on the drawings or specified herein conflicts in any way with any of the rules and regulations of the above authorities, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing 72 hours before bids are opened. In the event the Contractor fails to notify the Architect/Engineer andchanges are required by said conflicts, the Contractor shall make such changes as are required without additional cost to this Owner. C.Installations must be safe in every respect, and must not create a condition which will be harmful to building occupants;to operating, installing or testing personnel; to workmen; or to the public. The contractor for each installation shall be solely responsible for providing installations which will meet these conditions. If the Contractor believes that the installation will not be safe for all parties, report these beliefs in writing to the Architect/Engineer before any equipment is purchased or work is installed, giving recommendations. The Architect/Engineer will work out required changes and adjustments in contract price where adjustments are warranted. 1.5DRAWINGS A.A complete set of drawings shall be on the site at all times. Prior to installing any of the work, check the drawings for dimensions and see that the work does not interfere with clearance required for ceilings, beams, foundations, finished columns, pilasters, partitions and electrical equipment as shown on the drawings and details. After work is installed and it develops that interferences occur which have not been called to the Architect/Engineer's attention before the installation, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make such changes in his work as directed by the Architect/Engineer. B.The contract drawings for plumping work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement, the Contractor shall make such changes as directed by the Architect/Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner. C.Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be shown; but where such items are required by other sections of these specifications or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. Rough-in dimensions and locations shall be verified with the supplier of equipment furnished by other trades, or by the Owner, prior to the time of roughing-in. D.Equipment specification may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified, or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such items are required, they shall be included by the supplier of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-2 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING E.The drawings and the specifications are cooperative and supplementary. It is the intent of both said drawings and specifications to cover all mechanical requirements in their entirety as nearly as possible. The Contractor shall closely check the drawings and specifications for any obvious errors or omissions and bring any such condition to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to the receipt of bids, in order to permit clarification by means of a mailed Addendum. If there is no question prior to the bid proposal date, the Architect/Engineer shall assume that the drawings and specifications are complete and correct and will expect the intent of said documents to be complied with, and the installation to be complete in all respects, according to said intent. F.Locate equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Minor deviations from the contract drawings may be madeto allow for better accessibility, but changes of magnitude, or which involve extra cost, shall not be made without prior approval. Ample space shall be allowed for removal of parts that may require replacement or service in the future. G.All valves, etc. shall be accessible for maintenance purposes. Locate items carefully and coordinate with other trades so that each piece of equipment is accessible and functional. 1.6RESPONSIBILITY A.The Contractor's responsibility shall not end with the installation and connecting of the various apparatus. It shall include the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together with the qualified journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including equipment and materials furnished by other trades or by the Owner, until such time as the entire plumbing installation functions properly in every detail. 1.7COORDINATION A.Coordinate the work with other trades prior to installation. B.No pipingor equipment foreign to the electrical equipment or architectural appurtenances shall be run over the top of any electrical panels or electrical equipment, in accordance with NEC 110-16 and 384- 4. This does not prohibit sprinkler protection for the installation. C.The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid, but where discrepancies arise, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the required quantity. D.Where the specifications state that equipment shall be furnished, installed or provided, it shall be understood to mean this Contractor shall furnish and install completely, unless it is specifically stated that the equipment is to be furnished and installed by others. E.The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between the piping and equipment of the various contractors. Conflicts between the drawings and specifications, or between requirements set forth for the various trades, shall be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required, and that the Contractor has submitted his bid in conformance with plans and specifications as issued and that no interference exists. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-3 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 1.8GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE A.Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed to be free from defects and to be new equipment; no secondhand, used or salvaged equipment will be allowedexcept where specifically identified on the plans.The Owner's existing equipment which is to be relocated or reinstalled under this contract shall be refurbished, cleaned and repaired, and made subject to the guarantee and maintenance as herein specified, unless specifically noted otherwise. B.Keep the entire portion of the work in repair, without additional cost to the Owner, so far as defects in workmanship, apparatus, material or construction are concerned for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, except as otherwise specified herein. C.Equipment, which fails to meet performance ratings as specified and shown on the drawings, shall be removed and replaced by new equipment that meets the specified requirements, without additional cost to the Owner. D.Materials and workmanship shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, in whose presence various tests shall be made as required bythese specifications. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1SUBMITTALS A.Submit shop drawings and catalog data for mechanical equipment as called for in Division 1. B.Submittal data for plumbing equipment shall consist of shop drawings and/or catalog cuts showing technical data necessaryto evaluate the material or equipment to include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance curves, rating, control sequence, and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating characteristics. Shop drawings shall besubmitted on equipment and materials as required by the specifications. C.Approval of materials, including alternate or substitute items, shall be obtained in writing from the Architect/Engineer, verbal approval will not be considered binding. D.Shop drawingsshall be submitted and shall have been signed, checked, approved, and initialed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and willin so doing assume that the shop drawings conform to specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawing by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with elements of the specification. The name of the job, Architect/Engineer, location, and specification section shall appear on all pages of shop drawings. Equipment marks (such as WH-1) shall be indicated for each item. E.At the completion of the job, furnish three (3) copies of parts lists, operating and maintenance instructions, and manuals organized and bound, in three books. F.At the completion of the project, prepare and submit to the Owner record drawings showing the location of piping and ductwork. Drawing shall give accurate dimensions of such equipment for future use by the Owner. This drawing shall be submitted as soon as work is completed and before authorization of final payment. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-4 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 2.2SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIALS A.Submit to the Architect/Engineer for review, when requested, a list of subcontractors, materials and equipment proposed to be used. The list must be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer before this Contractor may enter into any subcontractual agreement. Equipment, materials, and devices, etc. shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, whether or not said items are herein specified. 2.3STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A.Materials shall be new, complete with manufacturer's guarantee or warranty, and shall be as listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc., Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA), American Gas Association (AGA), Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI), etc., if a standard has been established by that agency for the type of material. B.Materials shall also comply with applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, National Board of Fire Underwriters, National Fire Protection Association, National Safety Council, National Bureau of Standards, the National Electrical Code and the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. Such standards are hereby made a part of these specifications. C.Work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner, and shall present a neat mechanical appearance when completed. Align, level and adjust equipment for satisfactory operation, and install so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily and so that parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation and maintenance. Methods and techniques of installation shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer. D.Materials shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product. Materials of the same type of class shall be the products of one manufacturer. For example, roof and floor drains shall be from the same manufacturer. E.Materials shall be protected from damage, and stored indoors or protected from the weather at all times, unless other storage arrangements are approved by the Architect/Engineer. F.Bearing lubrication fittings shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be extended, where necessary, to an accessible location. G.Material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS A.Proposals as submitted shall be based on the products specifically named in the specification or on the drawings. Material or equipment by manufacturers other than those specified may be used only by permission of the Architect/Engineer. Such permission for substitution must be requested, in writing, in accordance with Division 1. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-5 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING B.The Architect/Engineer reserves the sole right for the approval of proposed material or equipment, and the phrase, "or approved equivalent", used in these specifications, or on the drawings, shall be interpreted to mean an equivalent approved by the Architect/Engineer. C.Changes required by alternate equipment shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner; and costs incurred by other trades, public utilities or the Owner, as a result of the use of such equipment, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. D.Furnish to the Architect/Engineer, when requested, samples of proposed material or equipment substitutions. These samples shall remain with the Architect/Engineer as long as needed. E.Identify the differences in alternate material or equipment as compared to that specified, and indicate the benefits to the project as a result of selecting the alternative. F.The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse approval of equipment which does not meet the specification, in their opinion, or of equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. The Architect/Engineer furtherreserves the right to reject equipment for which maintenance service and the availability of replacement parts is questionable. 2.5JOINING MATERIALS A.Refer to individual Division23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B.Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.ASMEB16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch(3.2-mm)maximumthickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a.Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b.Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2.AWWAC110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full- face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C.Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASMEB18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D.Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E.Solder Filler Metals: ASTMB32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTMB813. F.Brazing Filler Metals: AWSA5.8, BCuPSeries, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWSA5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G.Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWSD10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-6 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 2.6DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.Dissimilar metal piping fittings: Use Victaulic Style 47 dielectric waterway or equivalent by Anvil. No dielectric fittings shall be used." B.One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1.Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. C.Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1.Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. D.One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clipsand chrome-plated finish. E.Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. F.One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. G.Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.7GROUT A.Description: ASTMC1107, GradeB, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1.Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2.Design Mix: 5000-psi(34.5-MPa),28-day compressive strength. 3.Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1EXISTING CONDITIONS A.Examine the existingbuildings and grounds and become familiar with the conditions as they exist, or that will in any manner affect the work under this contract. No allowance will be made subsequently, in this connection, on behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence by the Contractor. B.Existing equipment, such as duct or pipe, in or on the existing building and grounds which is to be replaced, or which interferes in any way with the remodeling of the existing facilities and/or installation of newequipment, shall be removed from the premises or relocated by this Contractor, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Do not remove from the premises, any equipment that may have maintenance value to the Owner without permission of the Owner. Equipment,duct or pipe not to be reused shall be removed from the premises, unless otherwise noted herein or shown on the drawings. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-7 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING C.Where existing equipment is removed or changed, all duct and pipe no longer in service shall be removed and stubs plugged as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Building surfaces damaged and openings left by removal of equipment shall be repaired by the proper trades and paid for by this Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The cutting and fitting shall be done by this Contractor. The cutting of floor, ceiling or wall surfaces shall be done by this Contractor with extreme care, in order to avoid any disrupting or damage of existing utility services which may be encountered. Coordinate with other trades and with the General Contractor, to minimize the damage to the building in order to reduce the amount of patching required. D.Where new openings are cut and concealed piping is encountered, such items shall be removed or relocated as required. Where systems to be removed stub through floors, walls or ceilings, openings shall be patched so that no evidence of the former installation remains. E.Existing active services (water, gas, sewer, electric), when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. If active services are encountered which require relocation, make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the utility or municipality having jurisdiction. F.The location, size and elevation of underground utilities shown on the drawings are in accordance with data supplied by the Owner and/or the various utility companies. The Contractor shall verify this data and shall report any discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer before submitting his bid. 3.2INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE A.Changes in service shall be made so as to provide a minimum of interference with the operation of services in the building. When changes require shutdown of building services, notify the proper building authorities no less than 24hours in advance and obtain approval from these authorities before making changes. Such notices shall give duration and nature of shutdown. Temporary arrangements shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner. B.Any and all interruptions to building services shall be in accordance withDivision 1. 3.3PIPING SYSTEMS -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.Install piping according to the following requirements and Division22Sections specifying piping systems. B.Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculatefriction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C.Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D.Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E.Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-8 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING F.Install piping to permit valve servicing. G.Install piping at indicated slopes. H.Install piping free of sags and bends. I.Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J.Install piping to allow application of insulation. K.Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L.Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. M.Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. N.Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.4PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division23 Sections specifying piping systems. B.Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C.Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D.Soldered Joints: Apply ASTMB813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTMB828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTMB32. E.Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook,""Pipe and Tube"Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWSA5.8. F.Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASMEB1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1.Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2.Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G.Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWSD10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part1"Quality Assurance"Article. H.Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-9 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 3.5PIPING CONNECTIONS A.Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1.Install unions, in piping NPS2(DN50)and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2.Install flanges, in piping NPS2-1/2(DN65)and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.6OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A.The General Contractor shall coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure, as required for the installation of the mechanical work. B.Furnish to the General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings. This shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional patching is required due to this Contractor's failure to inspect this work, this Contractor shall make arrangements for the patching required to properly close the opening, to include patch painting. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect. C.When cutting and patching of the structure is made necessary due to this Contractor's failure to install piping, ducts, sleeves or equipment on schedule, or due to this Contractor's failure to furnish, on schedule, the information required for the leaving of openings, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements for this cutting and patching. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect. D.Provide cutting and patching and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of the work. Furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. Extent of cutting shall be minimized. Use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. 3.7CONCRETE AND MASONRYWORK A.Concrete bases and pads for mechanical equipment will be furnished by thiscontractor. Size bases to extend minimum of 4"beyond equipment base in any direction, and 4"above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners. B.Furnish equipment anchor bolts and be responsible for their proper installation and accurate location. 3.8PAINTING A.The finish of any item that has been marred, scratched or damaged in any way by this Contractor shall be repainted at the expense of this Contractor, and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-10 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING B.Painting and finishing of exposed mechanical systems including piping and duct shall be as shown on the drawings and in DIVISION 9 -FINISHES. 3.9CLEANING A.Keep the premises clean of all debris, caused by the work as described in DIVISION 1 B.Keep the premises clean of all debris caused by the work at all times, and keep materials stored, in areas designated by the Owner, in such a manner as not to interfere with the progress of the work of other Contractors or with the operation of existing facilities. C.At the conclusionof the construction, the site shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rubble, debris and unused material and shall be left in good order. Closed off spaces shall be cleaned of waste such as material, cartons, and wood frame members used in the construction. 3.10WIRING FOR MECHANICALEQUIPMENT A.The electricalcontractor will provide power to and connection of motors and equipment furnished by this Contractor. Where disconnect switches are not specified to be furnished with the equipment, the electricalContractor will furnish disconnect switches for equipment furnished by this Contractor. B.Provide integral wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring, temperature control wiring and interlock wiring for equipment furnished, whether or not such wiring is furnished by the equipment vendor. C.Except where other Sections call for starters to be furnished by manufacturers as part of their equipment, the electricalcontractor will furnish motor starters for motors furnished by this Contractor. D.Furnish to the electricalcontractor, shop drawings and a schedule for motors and other mechanical equipment furnished, which require electrical services. The schedule shall include the locations for rough-ins, electrical loads, size, and electrical characteristics for services required. E.Additional costs incurred, where motors or equipment furnished by this Contractor require larger services or services of different electrical characteristics than those called for on the Electrical Drawings, due to the Contractor furnishing substitute equipment, shall be paid for by this Contractor. F.Review the Electrical Drawings and call to the attention of the Architect/Engineer, prior to bidding, omissions of electrical services required for equipment. G.Mechanical equipment which requires fuse protection, to maintain UL listing, shall be coordinated with the electricalcontractor to provide such protection. 3.11PROTECTION A.Special care shall be taken for the protection of equipment furnished by this Contractor. Equipment and material shall be protected from elements such as weather, painting and plastering until the project is completed. Damage from rust, paint or scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-11 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING B.Protection of equipment during the plastering and painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the contractor performing that work, but this shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. C.Where the installation or connection of equipment requires this Contractor to work in areas previously finished by other contractors, this Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. This Contractor shall arrange with the other contractors for repairing and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged. D.When heavy materials must be placed upon or transported over the roof deck, sheeting shall be placed to distribute the weight and support such materials. Any damage shall be immediately corrected at no cost to the Owner. 3.12ASBESTOS IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL A.In the event that suspected asbestos containing material (ACM) is encountered during the course of the work, cease operations in the immediate area and promptly notify the Architect/Engineer. Suspected materials will then be sampled and analyzed by the Owner. Should ACM be identified, the Owner's Representative will direct the procedures for abatement, either by subcontract to the Contractor or separate contractor. During abatement operations, cease operations in the immediate area of the abatement. Operations in other areas of the project may be performed, but care must be taken to control dust to avoid contamination of the abatement containment or air monitoring samples. The Contractor shall coordinate activities with the asbestos abatement contractor. Should no ACM be identified, operations may be resumed. Delays caused by identification, analysis or abatement may be added to the time of the contract, atthe discretion of the Architect/Engineer by Change Order. 3.13NOISE AND VIBRATION A.Be responsible for the installation of all equipment in such a manner as to control the transmission of noise and vibration from any installed equipment or system, so that the sound level does not exceed NC35 in any occupied space. Be responsible for the correction of any objectionable noise in any occupied area due to improperly installed equipment. 3.14TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A.Systems shall be tested and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to the Owner. B.Prior to acceptance of the mechanical installation, demonstrate to the Owner or his designated representatives essential features and functions of all systems installed, and instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. C.Furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions, and arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives for the system present to assist with the demonstrations. The Ownerand Contractor shall each sign a certification stating that the training has been performed and the Owner accepts same. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-12 SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 3.15UTILITY REBATE APPLICATIONS A.This contractor shall be responsible for gathering information necessary for completing local utility rebate applications, and submitting to the proper utility companies for gas and electric rebates. Potential rebates include high efficiency gas boilers, thermostats, timeclocks, motors, and other items furnished by this plumbing contractor. END OF SECTION 220500 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220500-13 SECTION 22 0519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide equipment, materials, labor, and supervision necessary to install thermometers and gauges. 1.2QUALIFICATIONS A.Thermometers: Weiss A-78-23-1/2. Ashcroft, Reotemp,Weksler, or U.S. Gauge. B.Gauges: Weksler, Type BF1 forwater, Type AA1 for steam, with lever handle union cocks. Ashcroft, Weiss, or U.S. Gauge. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Submit manufacturer's product and installation data PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1THERMOMETERS A.9 in. "Adjust-Angle" industrial thermometer, complete with double thick glass front, red reading mercury, separable socket and arranged so the unit can be set at any required angle front to back or left to right during or after installation. B.Range:32° F to 240° F for hot water. 2.2GAUGES A.4-1/2 in. compound pressure vacuum gauge, aluminum case, white dial, 1/4-in. male NPT. B.Range. 1.30 in. vacuum to 100 pound pressure. C.Provide level handle union cock. 2.3THERMOMETER WELLS A.Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well. B.Manufacturer: Same as thermometers. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install thermometers in discharge and return piping at and at other points as shown on the Drawings. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Meters & Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 0519-1 SECTION 22 0519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING B.Install gauge for each pump, mounted on 1/4 in. galvanized steel pipe manifold connected to the suction and discharge of the pump, with lever handle union cocks in the manifold on each side of the gauge, so that the gauge may be opened to either the suction or discharge pressure. C.Install gauges at pressure reducing valves and at other points as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION 22 0519 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Meters & Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 0519-2 SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide equipment, materials, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to hot and cold surfaces of piping, tanks, fittings and other surfaces. B.Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.2CODES AND STANDARDS A.Insulating materials, jackets and mastics shall meet flame spread, fuel contribution and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA-90A. Flamespread rating in accordance with NFPA 255, ASTM E-84 or UL 723 of not more than 25; smoke developed rating of not more than 50, unless otherwise noted in this section. B.Insulation that has been treated with a flame-retardant additive to meet the flame spread and smoke developed ratings shown above is not permitted. C.Insulation materials shall be noncorrosive to the materials they are applied to, including stress corrosion cracking of stainless steel, and shall not breed or promote fungus and bacteria. D.Insulation shall meet or exceed all requirements of ASHRAE/IES 90.1. 1.3QUALIFICATION A.Insulating materials by Owens-Corning, Armstrong, Pittsburgh-Corning, Knauf, Rubatex, Schuller, CertainTeed Manson, or approved equivalent. B.Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1INSULATION A.Description 1.Type A: Preformed, sectional, heavy density fiberglass insulation, suitable for operating temperatures form –20F to +850F. Equipped with factory-applied, all-service vapor barrier jacket constructed of white Kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn, with pressure-sensitive, self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 2 Thermal conductivity of0.23 BTU-in/hr-ft-F @ 75F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Schuller "Micro-Lok AP-T" or approved equivalent. 2.Type I: Fiberglass duct wrap, 1.5 PCF density, fabricated of inorganic glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin with factory applied foil Skrim-Kraft facing, suitable for operating 2 temperature up to +250F. Thermal conductivity of 0.26 BTU-in/hr-ft-F @ 75F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Knauf "Duct Wrap" or engineer approved equivalent. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Plumbing Insulation 22 0700-1 SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION 2.2INSULATION JACKETS A.20-mil high impact PVC secured with spray contact adhesive. All PVC jacketing shall meet the 25/50 SDR. Manville "Zeston 2000" or equivalent. B.6-oz/sq yd UL listed cotton canvas fabric secured with Childers CP50 lagging adhesive. C.Fitting and valve jackets shall be premolded PVC with joints and seams sealed with a spray contact adhesive or vapor barrier mastic. Premolded jackets shall be Manville "Zeston 2000" or approved equivalent. D.At wall penetrations provide an additional jacket of0.020 inch thick smooth finish aluminum.Metal jacket shall have factory applied moisture barrier. Fitting and valve covers to be preformed of same material as adjacent metal jacket. E.Where PVC or metal jackets are used, delete the factory applied ASJ onpipe and equipment operating above 75F. F.PVC jackets shall be used in the following areas and systems: 1.Whenever piping is routed exposed through occupied spaces. 2.Exposed piping. 3.PremoldedPVC at all fittings and valve jackets. G.Insulated Fittings: 1.Use “Valve Wrap” insulated wraps at all fittings and valves. Provide reusable insulated wraps for unions, strainers, autoflow valves, circuit setters, check valves and components integral to heat pump hose kits. 2.Provide with insulation values (i.e. thickness) consistent with insulation specified for associated piping service. Valve wrap shall be provided in sufficient length to completely conceal all integral components including 2” minimum overlap on pipe at each end. 3.Wraps shall be No Sweatreusable wraps (www.valvewraps.com) or approved equivalent. 4.Wraps shall be sized and installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. 5.Ensure locations of all wrapped components are clearly identified on mechanical contractors’ record drawings. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulation materials supplier's recommendations, except where a higher standard is specified. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Plumbing Insulation 22 0700-2 SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION B.Install materials after systems have been tested and approved. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed form surfaces to be insulated. C.Insulation shall be kept clean and dry at all times. D.Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, a fire seal shall be provided. 3.2PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A.Insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections and expansion joints with premolded or mitered segments ofsame insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering. B.Pipe insulation shall continue through sleeves and hangers with vapor barrier and/or jacket. C.Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following: 1.Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures, except exposed hot water supply and trap to fixtures for use by the physically handicapped. 2.Sanitary drain lines. 3.Vents and water hammer arrestors. D.Insert to be between support shield and piping but under the finish jacket. Provide an insert at hangers not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. E.Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. 1.On hot systems where fittings are to be left exposed, insulation ends shall be beveled away from bolts for easy access. 2.On cold systems, valve stems shall be sealed with caulking which allows free movement of the stem, but provides a seal against moisture incursion. 3.3EQUIPMENT INSULATION A.Do not insulate factory-insulated equipment. B.Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring and beveling insulation, if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires or bands. C.Fill joints, cracks, seams and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement. D.Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with ¼" coat of insulating cement applied in two 1/8" layers, if non-faced insulation is used. E.Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Plumbing Insulation 22 0700-3 SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION F.When equipment with insulation requiresperiodical opening for maintenance, repair or cleaning such as at manway covers or strainer plugs, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage. Removable insulation shall have a vapor-proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. G.Joints shall be sealed with 2" wide vapor barrier tape or strips to match insulation jacket, using a fire- resistive adhesive. 3.4PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE INSULATION SERVICETYPETHICKNESSPIPE SIZES Domestic Cold WaterA½"All pipe sizes A1½"Up to1½" pipe Domestic Hot Water (105F & greater). size Domestic and Recirculation Hot Water (105F & 2"2" & up pipe size greater) Hot Water Storage TankI1½" END OF SECTION 22 0700 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Plumbing Insulation 22 0700-4 SECTION 22 3400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Furnish equipment, materials, tools, labor, and supervision necessary to install Domestic Water Heaters as required by the Drawings and this Section. 1.2STANDARDS AND CODES A.Tanks shall be designed, constructed, and stamped in accordance with ASME Code, Section IV, Part HLW. B.Units shall include ASME T & P Relief Valves, Thermometer and Pressure Gauges, all in accordance with State and local codes. C.Insulation of storage tanks shall conform to Appendix J of the Standard Building Code, Section J-8, Paragraph J-8.6. D.ASHRAE 90.1b-1992, Standards for Energy Efficiency. E.NSF, CSAand UL listed. 1.3QUALIFICATIONS A.Units shall be by Ruud, PVI, State, Lochinvar, or Patterson-Kelly Company. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit product and performance data. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE HEATER-GAS A.Water heater shall be of glass-lined design and include a powered gas burner with electronic flame safeguard, intermittent ignition, main and pilot automatic gas valves, gas pressure regulator, diaphragm air switch for proof of blower operation, and flame inspection port. Heater shall be equipped with (2) 4 handhole cleanouts, shall have an ASME working pressure of 160 PSI, and stamped National Board. Controls shall include: High temperature limit control (manual reset), upper and lower thermostats, combination temperature and pressure gauge, low water cutoff, ASME rated temperature, and pressure relief valve. Control compartment door shall be hinged for easy access. The heater shall be equipped with multiple powered anodes for cathodic protection and include an inlet water diffuser for minimizing scale deposits. The heater shall be insulated with vermin-proof glass fiber insulation. Heater must meet ASHRAE 90 A-l980 (1982 requirements) for recovery efficiency and standby loss. The outer jacket shall have a baked enamel finish overa bonderized undercoating. All internal surfaces of the heater exposed to water shall be glass lined and have a nickelous oxide undercoating. The glass lining shall be fused to the steel by firing at a oo temperature range of 1,400F to 1,600F. Heater tank shall have a 3-year warranty against corrosion. B.Recovery section shall be sufficient capacity as scheduled on the Drawings. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 3400-1 SECTION 22 3400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS C.Storage section shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. ASME code working pressure shall be 150 psig. D.Water heater shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV Part HLW. 2.2HEATER STACK 1.PVC Schedule 40. 2.3HOT WATER STORAGE TANK A.Tank shall be of glass-lined design. The tank shall be insulated with vermin-proof glass fiber insulation. The outer jacket shall have a baked enamel finish over a bonderized undercoating. All internal surfaces of the tank exposed to water shall be glass lined and have a nickelous oxide undercoating. The glass lining shall be fused to the steelby firing at a temperature range of 1,400°F to 1,600°F. Tank shall have a 3-year warranty against corrosion. B.Storage shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. ASME code working pressure shall be 150 psig. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Layout exact location for concrete base and furnish to General Contractor a dimensional drawing showing base size and location. B.Install heater and make hot and cold water connections, gas and flue connections and circulating line connection. floor drain C.Route T & P relief piping to . END OF SECTION 22 3400 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 3400-2 Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning 23 Division SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.The work shall include the furnishings of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division and as called for on the Mechanical Drawings to include supervision, quality control, operation, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete mechanical installation. The work shall also include the furnishing of necessary hoisting facilities to set materials and equipment in place and the furnishing of any scaffolding and transportation associated with this work. B.Examine the project site and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect the work. Review the drawings and specifications of other trades andtake note of conditions to be created which will affect the work. All conditions shall be considered in the preparation of bids; no additional compensation will be made on the behalf of this Contractor. C.Provide labor necessary to demolish the existing mechanical system as shown on the drawings, as described in Part 3, Existing Conditions, or as required. D.Where noted on the drawings or where called for in other sections of the specification, the Contractor for this division shall install equipment furnished by others, and shall make required service connections. Verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. This contractor shall be responsible for the removal and installation of railings, piping, ductwork, louvers, etc. as required to install new equipment. Coordinate shipping splits for all equipment provided by this contractor. 1.2DAMAGE E.The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the work of other trades, or to the building and its contents, caused by equipment installation. 1.3PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A.Obtain and furnish necessary permits and inspection certificates for material and labor furnished. Permits and certificates shall be obtained from the proper inspection authorities. The cost of permits, certificates and fees required in connection with the installation shall be borne by the Contractor, unless otherwise noted in the detailed contractual description preceding these specifications. Where applications are required for the procuring of utility services to the building, see that such application is properly filed with the utility, and that information required for such an application is presented to the extent and in the form required by the utility company. 1.4CODES AND STANDARDS A.Applicable provisions of the following codes and standards are hereby imposed on a general basis for the mechanical work (in addition to specific applications specified by individual work sections of these specifications): 1.ASHRAE/IES 90.1 -Code for Energy Efficiency 2.ANSI Pressure Piping Standards (B31) City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-1 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 3.ASHRAE Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI B9.1) 4.AWWA Standards 5.ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and State Boiler Code 6.AWS Standards for Welding 7.National Electrical Code 8.Local and/or State Plumbing, Mechanical and Building Codes 9.Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 10.International Plumbing Code 11.International Mechanical Code 12.NFPA Standards and Pamphlets 13.International Energy conservation Code B.If any work indicated on the drawings or specified herein conflicts in any way with any of the rules and regulations of the above authorities, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing 72 hours before bids are opened. In the event the Contractor fails to notify the Architect/Engineer and changes are required by said conflicts, the Contractor shall make such changes as are required without additional cost to this Owner. C.Installations must be safe in every respect, and must not create a condition which will be harmful to building occupants; to operating, installing or testing personnel; to workmen; or to the public. The contractor for each installation shall be solely responsible for providing installations which will meet these conditions. If the Contractor believes that the installation will not be safe for all parties, report these beliefs in writing to the Architect/Engineer before any equipment is purchased or work is installed, giving recommendations. The Architect/Engineer will work out required changes and adjustments in contract price where adjustments are warranted. 1.5DRAWINGS A.A complete set of drawings shall be on the site at all times. Prior to installing any of the work, check the drawings for dimensions and see that the work does not interfere with clearance required for ceilings, beams, foundations, finished columns, pilasters, partitions and electrical equipment as shown on the drawings and details. After work is installed and it develops that interferences occur which have not been called to the Architect/Engineer's attention before the installation,the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make such changes in his work as directed by the Architect/Engineer. B.The contract drawings for mechanical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement, the Contractor shall make such changes as directed by the Architect/Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-2 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC C.Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be shown; but where such items are required by other sections of these specifications or where they are required by the nature of thework, they shall be furnished and installed. Rough-in dimensions and locations shall be verified with the supplier of equipment furnished by other trades, or by the Owner, prior to the time of roughing-in. D.Equipment specification may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified, or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such items are required, they shall be included by the supplier of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. E.The drawings and the specifications are cooperative and supplementary. It is the intent of both said drawings and specifications to cover all mechanical requirements in their entirety asnearly as possible. The Contractor shall closely check the drawings and specifications for any obvious errors or omissions and bring any such condition to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to the receipt of bids, in order to permit clarification by means of a mailed Addendum. If there is no question prior to the bid proposal date, the Architect/Engineer shall assume that the drawings and specifications are complete and correct and will expect the intent of said documents to be complied with, and the installation to be complete in all respects, according to said intent. F.Locate equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Minor deviations from the contract drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility, but changes of magnitude, or which involve extra cost, shall not be made without prior approval. Ample space shall be allowed for removal of parts that may require replacement or service in the future. G.All valves, fire dampers, automatic dampers, smoke dampers, damper operators, reheat coils, etc. shall be accessible for maintenance purposes. Locate items carefully and coordinate with other trades so that each piece of equipment is accessible and functional. Items located above a non-accessible ceiling, chase, or soffit shall be accessible through an access door. Coordinate location of access doors with the general contractor. 1.6RESPONSIBILITY A.The Contractor's responsibility shall not end with the installation and connecting of the various apparatus. It shall include the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together with the qualified journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including equipment and materials furnished by other trades or by the Owner, until such time as the entire mechanical installation functions properly in every detail. 1.7COORDINATION A.Coordinate the work with other trades prior to installation. B.No piping, ducts or equipment foreign to the electrical equipment or architectural appurtenances shall be run over the top of any electrical panels or electrical equipment, in accordance with NEC 110-16 and 384-4. This does not prohibit sprinkler protection for the installation. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-3 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC C.The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid, but where discrepancies arise, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the required quantity. D.Where the specifications state that equipment shall be furnished, installed or provided, it shall be understood to mean this Contractor shall furnish and install completely, unless it is specifically stated that the equipment is to be furnished and installed by others. E.The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between the piping and equipment of the various contractors. Conflicts between the drawings and specifications, or between requirements set forth for the various trades, shall be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required, and that the Contractor has submitted his bid in conformance with plans and specifications as issued and that no interference exists. 1.8GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE A.Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed to be free from defects and to be new equipment; no secondhand, used or salvaged equipment will be allowedexcept where specifically identified on the plans. The Owner's existing equipment which is to be relocated or reinstalled under this contract shall be refurbished, cleaned and repaired, and made subject to the guarantee and maintenance as herein specified, unless specifically noted otherwise. B.Keep the entire portion of the work in repair, without additional cost to the Owner, so far as defects in workmanship, apparatus, material or construction are concerned for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, except as otherwise specified herein. C.Equipment, which fails to meet performance ratings as specified and shown on the drawings, shall be removed and replaced by new equipment that meets the specified requirements, without additional cost to the Owner. D.Materials and workmanship shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, in whose presence various tests shall be made as required by these specifications. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1SUBMITTALS A.Submit shop drawings and catalog data for mechanical equipment as called for in Division 1. B.Submittal data for mechanical equipment shall consist of shop drawings and/or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the material or equipment to include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance curves, rating, control sequence, and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating characteristics. Shop drawings shall be submitted on equipment and materials as required by the specifications. C.Approval of materials, including alternate or substitute items, shall be obtained in writing from the Architect/Engineer, verbal approval will not be considered binding. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-4 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC D.Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall have been signed, checked, approved, and initialed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and will in so doing assume that the shop drawings conform to specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawing by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with elements of the specification. The nameof the job, Architect/Engineer, location, and specification section shall appear on all pages of shop drawings. Equipment marks (such as B-1,P-1) shall be indicated for each item. E.At the completion of the job, furnish three (3) copies of parts lists, operating and maintenance instructions, and manuals organized and bound, in three books. F.At the completion of the project, prepare and submit to the Owner record drawings showing the location of piping and ductwork. Drawing shall give accurate dimensions of such equipment for future use by the Owner. This drawing shall be submitted as soon as work is completed and before authorization of final payment. 2.2SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIALS G.Submit to the Architect/Engineer for review, when requested, a list of subcontractors, materials and equipment proposed to be used. The list must be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer before this Contractor may enter into any subcontractual agreement. Equipment, materials, and devices, etc. shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, whether or not said items are herein specified. 2.3STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A.Materials shall be new, complete with manufacturer's guarantee or warranty, and shall be as listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc., Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA), American Gas Association (AGA), Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI), etc., if a standard has been established by that agency for the type of material. B.Materials shall also comply with applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, National Board of Fire Underwriters, National Fire Protection Association, National Safety Council, National Bureau of Standards, the National Electrical Code and the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. Such standards are hereby made a part of these specifications. C.Work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner, and shall present a neat mechanical appearance when completed. Align, level and adjust equipment for satisfactory operation, and install so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily and so that parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation and maintenance. Methods and techniques of installation shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer. D.Materials shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product. Materials of the same type of class shall be the products of one manufacturer. For example, fans shall be from the same manufacturer and pumps from the same manufacturer. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-5 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC E.Materials shall be protected from damage, and stored indoors or protected from the weather at all times, unless other storage arrangements are approved by the Architect/Engineer. F.Bearing lubrication fittings shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be extended, where necessary, to an accessible location. G.Material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS A.Proposals as submitted shall be based on the products specifically named in the specification or on the drawings. Material or equipment by manufacturers other than those specified may be used only by permission of the Architect/Engineer. Such permission for substitution must be requested, in writing, in accordance with Division 1. B.The Architect/Engineer reserves the sole right for the approval of proposed material or equipment, and the phrase, "or approved equivalent", used in these specifications, or on the drawings, shall be interpreted to mean an equivalent approved by the Architect/Engineer. C.Changes required by alternate equipment shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner; and costs incurred by other trades, public utilities or the Owner, as a result of the use of such equipment, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. D.Furnish to the Architect/Engineer, when requested, samples of proposed material or equipment substitutions. These samples shall remain with the Architect/Engineer as long as needed. E.Identify the differences in alternate material or equipment as compared to that specified, and indicate the benefits to the project as a result of selecting the alternative. F.The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse approval of equipment which does not meet the specification, in their opinion, or of equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. The Architect/Engineer further reserves the right to reject equipment for which maintenance service and the availability of replacement parts is questionable. 2.5JOINING MATERIALS A.Refer to individual Division23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B.Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.ASMEB16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch(3.2-mm)maximumthickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a.Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b.Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class250, cast-iron and steel flanges. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-6 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 2.AWWAC110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full- face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C.Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASMEB18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D.Solder Filler Metals: ASTMB32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTMB813. E.Brazing Filler Metals: AWSA5.8, BCuPSeries, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWSA5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. F.Welding Filler Metals:Comply with AWSD10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.6TRANSITION FITTINGS A.Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVCone-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1.Manufacturers:Eslon Thermoplastics. B.Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1.Manufacturers:Thompson Plastics, Inc. C.Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSSSP-107,CPVC and PVCfour-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut. 1.Manufacturers: a.NIBCO INC. b.NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div. 2.7DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.Dissimilar metal piping fittings: Use VictaulicStyle 47 dielectric waterway or equivalent by Anvil. No dielectric fittings shall be used." 2.8SLEEVES A.Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch(0.6-mm)minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B.Steel Pipe: ASTMA53, TypeE, Grade B, Schedule40, galvanized, plain ends. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-7 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC C.Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe"equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D.Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1.Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E.Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F.PVC Pipe: ASTMD1785, Schedule40. G.Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.9GROUT A.Description: ASTMC1107, GradeB, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1.Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2.Design Mix: 5000-psi(34.5-MPa),28-day compressive strength. 3.Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1EXISTING CONDITIONS A.Examine the existingbuildings and grounds and become familiar with the conditions as they exist, or that will in any manner affect the work under this contract. No allowance will be made subsequently, in this connection, on behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence by the Contractor. B.Existing equipment, such as duct or pipe, in or on the existing building and grounds which is to be replaced, or which interferes in any way with the remodeling of the existing facilities and/or installation of new equipment, shall be removed from the premises or relocated by this Contractor, as directed by theArchitect/Engineer. Do not remove from the premises, any equipment that may have maintenance value to the Owner without permission of the Owner. Equipment, duct or pipe not to be reused shall be removed from the premises, unless otherwise noted herein or shown on the drawings. C.Where existing equipment is removed or changed, all duct and pipe no longer in service shall be removed and stubs plugged as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Building surfaces damaged and openings left by removal of equipment shall be repaired by the proper trades and paid for by this Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The cutting and fitting shall be done by this Contractor. The cutting of floor, ceiling or wall surfaces shall be done by this Contractor with extreme care, in order to avoid any disrupting or damage of existing utility services which may be encountered. Coordinate with other trades and with the General Contractor, to minimize the damage to the building in order to reduce the amount of patching required. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-8 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC D.Where new openings are cut and concealed piping is encountered, such items shall be removed or relocated as required. Where systems to be removed stub through floors, walls or ceilings, openings shall be patched so that no evidence of the formerinstallation remains. E.Existing active services (water, gas, sewer, electric), when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. If active services are encountered which require relocation, make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the utility or municipality having jurisdiction. F.The location, size and elevation of underground utilities shown on the drawings are in accordance with data supplied by the Owner and/or the various utility companies. The Contractor shall verify this data and shall report any discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer before submitting his bid. 3.2INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE A.Changes in service shall be made so as to provide a minimum of interference with the operation of services in the building. When changes require shutdown of building services, notify the proper building authorities no less than 24hours in advance and obtain approval from these authorities before making changes. Such notices shall give duration and nature of shutdown. Temporary arrangements shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner. B.Any and all interruptions to building services shall be in accordance withDivision 1. 3.3PIPING SYSTEMS -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.Install piping according to the following requirements and Division23 Sections specifying piping systems. B.Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C.Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D.Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E.Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F.Install piping to permit valve servicing. G.Install piping at indicated slopes. H.Installpiping free of sags and bends. I.Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-9 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC J.Install piping to allow application of insulation. K.Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L.Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. M.Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. N.Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. O.Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a.Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2inches(50mm)above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2.Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3.Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch(6.4-mm)annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a.SteelPipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS6(DN150). b.Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS6(DN150)and larger, penetrating gypsum- board partitions. c.Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches(50mm)above finished floor level. 1)Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4.Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. P.Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Q.Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. R.Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.4PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division23 Sections specifying piping systems. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-10 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC B.Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C.Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D.Soldered Joints: Apply ASTMB813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTMB828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTMB32. E.Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook,""Pipe and Tube"Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complyingwith AWSA5.8. F.Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASMEB1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1.Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2.Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G.Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWSD10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part1"Quality Assurance"Article. H.Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.5PIPING CONNECTIONS A.Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1.Install unions, in piping NPS2and smaller, adjacent to each valve and atfinal connection to each piece of equipment. 2.Install flanges, in piping NPS2-1/2and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.6OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A.The General Contractor shall coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure, as required for the installation of the mechanical work. B.Furnish to the General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings. This shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional patching is required due to this Contractor's failure to inspect this work, this Contractor shall make arrangements for the patching required to properly close the opening, to include patch painting. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-11 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC C.When cutting and patching of the structure is made necessary due to this Contractor's failure to install piping, ducts, sleeves or equipment on schedule, or due to this Contractor's failure to furnish, on schedule, the information required for the leaving of openings, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements for this cutting and patching. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect. D.Provide cutting and patching and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of the work. Furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. Cutting of structural support members will not be permittedwithout prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. Extent of cutting shall be minimized. Use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performedby craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. 3.7CONCRETE AND MASONRYWORK A.Concrete bases and pads for mechanical equipment will be furnished by this contractor.Size bases to extend minimum of 4"beyond equipment base in any direction, and 4"above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners. B.Furnish equipment anchor bolts and be responsible for their proper installation and accurate location. 3.8ROOF OPENINGS A.Roof openings required by this Contractor that are not shown on the Structural or Architectural Drawings shall be cut and (if necessary) reinforced by an experienced roofing contractor. B.Roof penetrations for duct and piping shall be according to drawing details. Equipment supports shall be by curbed and flashed runners meeting current National Roofing Contractor Association (NRCA) standards and details. Pitch pockets, pitch pans, and wood blocking are not acceptable. C.All roof work shall be completed such that it does not void any existing roof warranty. 3.9PAINTING A.The finish of any item that has been marred, scratched or damaged in anyway by this Contractor shall be repainted at the expense of this Contractor, and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. 3.10CLEANING A.Keep the premises clean of all debris, caused by the work as described in DIVISION 1 B.Keep the premises clean of all debris caused by the work at all times, and keep materials stored, in areas designated by the Owner, in such a manner as not to interfere with the progress of the work of other Contractors or with the operation of existing facilities. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-12 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC C.At the conclusion of the construction, the site shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rubble, debris and unused material and shall be left in good order. Closed off spaces shall be cleaned of waste such as material, cartons, and wood frame members used in the construction. 3.11WIRING FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A.The electricalcontractor will provide power to and connection of motors and equipment furnished by this Contractor. Where disconnect switches are not specified to be furnished with the equipment, the electricalContractor will furnish disconnect switches for equipment furnished by this Contractor. B.Provide integral wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring, temperature control wiring and interlock wiring for equipment furnished, whether or not such wiring is furnished by the equipment vendor. C.Except where other Sections call for starters to be furnished by manufacturers as part of their equipment, the electricalcontractor will furnish motor starters for motors furnished by this Contractor. D.Furnish to the electricalcontractor, shop drawings and a schedule for motors and other mechanical equipment furnished, which require electrical services. The schedule shall include the locations for rough-ins, electrical loads, size, and electrical characteristics for services required. E.Additional costs incurred, where motors or equipment furnished by this Contractor require larger services or services of different electrical characteristics than those called for on the Electrical Drawings, due to the Contractor furnishing substitute equipment, shall be paid for by this Contractor. F.Review the Electrical Drawings and call to the attention of the Architect/Engineer, prior to bidding, omissions of electrical services required for equipment. G.Mechanical equipment which requires fuse protection, to maintain UL listing, shall be coordinated with the electricalcontractor to provide such protection. 3.12MOTORS A.TEFC and ODP motors for equipment supplied by this contractor shall meet or exceed the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT-92). The following table lists the nominal full-load efficiencies for various motor horsepowers at 1800 RPM: HP11.52357.5101520 ODP82.5848486.587.588.589.59191 TEFC82.5848487.587.589.589.59191 B.All motors that are indicated to be used with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD's) shall be inverter duty rated. Coordinate all motor requirements with the electrical contractor. C.Provide motor shaft grounding kit for all VFD motors. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-13 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 3.13PROTECTION A.Special care shall be taken for the protection of equipment furnished by this Contractor. Equipment and material shall be protected from elements such as weather, painting and plastering until the project is completed. Damage from rust, paint or scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. B.Protection of equipment during the plastering and painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the contractor performing that work, but this shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. C.Where the installation or connection of equipment requires this Contractor to work in areas previously finished by other contractors, this Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. This Contractor shall arrange with the other contractors for repairing and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged. D.When heavy materials must be placed upon or transported over the roof deck, sheeting shall be placed to distribute the weight and support such materials. Any damage shall be immediately corrected at no cost to the Owner. 3.14ASBESTOS IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL A.In the event that suspected asbestos containing material (ACM) is encountered during the course of the work, cease operations in the immediate area and promptly notify the Architect/Engineer. Suspected materials will then be sampled and analyzed by the Owner. Should ACM be identified, the Owner's Representative will direct the procedures for abatement, either by subcontract to the Contractor or separate contractor. During abatement operations, cease operations in the immediate area of the abatement. Operations in other areas of the project may be performed, but care must be taken to control dust to avoid contamination of the abatement containment or air monitoring samples. The Contractor shall coordinate activities with the asbestos abatement contractor. Should no ACM be identified, operations may be resumed. Delays caused by identification, analysis or abatement may be added to the time of the contract, at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer by Change Order. 3.15NOISE AND VIBRATION A.Be responsible for the installation of all equipment in such a manner as to control thetransmission of noise and vibration from any installed equipment or system, so that the sound level does not exceed NC35 in any occupied space. Be responsible for the correction of any objectionable noise in any occupied area due to improperly installed equipment. 3.16TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A.Systems shall be tested and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to the Owner. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-14 SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC B.Prior to acceptance of the mechanical installation, demonstrate to the Owner or his designated representatives essential features and functions of all systems installed, and instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. C.Furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions, and arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives for the system present to assist with the demonstrations. The Owner and Contractor shall each sign a certification stating that the training has been performed and the Owner accepts same. 3.17UTILITY REBATE APPLICATIONS A.This contractor shall be responsible for gathering information necessary for completing local utility rebate applications, and submitting to the proper utility companies for gas and electric rebates. Potential rebates include high efficiency gas boilers, thermostats, timeclocks, motors, and other items furnished by this mechanical contractor. END OF SECTION 23 0500 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 0500-15 SECTION 23 0519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide equipment, materials, labor, and supervision necessary to install thermometers and gauges. 1.2QUALIFICATIONS A.Thermometers: Weiss A-78-23-1/2. Ashcroft, U.S. Gauge, or Reotemp. B.Gauges: Weksler, Type BF1 for water, Type AA1 for steam, with lever handle union cocks. Ashcroft, U.S. Gauge, or McDaniel. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Submit manufacturer's product and installation data. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1THERMOMETERS A.9 in. "Adjust-Angle" industrial thermometer, complete with double thick glass front, redreading mercury, separable socket and arranged so the unit can be set at any required angle front to back or left to right during or after installation. B.Range 1.0° F -160° F for geothermal. 2.2GAUGES A.4-1/2 in.compoundpressurevacuumgauge, aluminum case, white dial, 1/4-in. male NPT. B.Range. 1.30in. vacuumto 100 pound pressure. C.Provide level handle union cock. 2.3THERMOMETER WELLS A.Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well. B.Manufacturer: Same as thermometers. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Meters & Gauges for HVAC Piping 23 0519-1 SECTION 23 0519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install thermometers in discharge and return piping at well field, at each supply and return connection for large heating and cooling coils and at other points as shown on the Drawings. B.Install gauge for each pump, mounted on 1/4 in. galvanized steel pipe manifold connected to the suction and discharge of the pump, with lever handle union cocks in the manifold on each side of the gauge, so that the gauge may be opened to either the suction or discharge pressure. C.Install gaugesat pressure reducing valves and at other points as shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 23 0519 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Meters & Gauges for HVAC Piping 23 0519-2 SECTION 23 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide equipment, materials, labor, and supervision necessary to install valves as indicated on drawings and in schedules, and herein specified. B.As nearly as possible, valves of the same type shall be of a single manufacturer. Valves shall conform to ANSI standard dimensions. 1.2SUBMITTALS A.Submit detailed Shop Drawings and Product Data clearly indicating manufacturer, model, size, dimensions and pressure rating. B.Submit valve schedule, indicating valve ID, type, size and intended service and location. 1.3PACKAGING A.Valves shall be furnished or provided with protective packaging to prevent damage during shipping or on the job site. 1.4DEFINITIONS S.P.-Saturated Steam Pressure W.P.-Working Pressure W.O.G. -Water, Oil, Gas Pressure BR.-Bronze I.B.B.M.-Iron Body, Bronze-Mounted O.S.&Y.-Outside Screw and Yoke N.R.S.-Non-Rising Stem R.S.-Rising Stem M.S.S.-Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by one of the following, as listed for each valve type, or Engineer-approved equivalent. Valve TypeApproved Manufacturer Gate, Globe, and Check Crane, Stockham, Lunkenheimer, Hammond Industrial Series, ValvesNIBCO, Milwaukee Jamesbury, Apollo, Jenkins, Milwaukee, Watts, Worchester, Ball Valves Powell, or NIBCO City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 0523-1 SECTION 23 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING Valve TypeApproved Manufacturer Lined: Keystone, Demco, Milwaukee, Centerline, NIBCO Butterfly Valves High Performance: Jamesbury, Dezurik, Durco 2.2GENERAL A.Materials: Discs, gaskets, packings, seats, diaphragms and lubricants shall conform to recommendations of the valve manufacturer for the intended use. B.Body materials, unless otherwise stated: 1.Bronze: 125-150 lbs., ASTM B62 2.Iron: 200-300 lbs., ASTM B61 3.Cast Iron: ASTM A126, Class B 4.Cast Iron: ASTM 448 5.Ductile Iron: ASTM A395 6.Cast Steel: ASTM A216 2.3GATE VALVES A.Provide gate valves complying with MSS SP-80. Gate valves shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 1.2 in. and Smaller: 125-lb. saturated steam, screwed, solid wedge disc, and all parts ASTM B62 grade bronze except wheel and packing. 2.2-1/2 in. through 16 in.: 125-lb. saturated steam, O.S.&Y., flanged ends, bronze seats and stem, double-seated solid wedge disc, iron body and bonnet. B.Equip valves with packing suitable for intended service. C.Provide gate valves designed such that back seating protects packing and stem threads from fluid when valve is fully opened. Equip valves with gland follower. 2.4GLOBE VALVES A.Provide bronze globe valves complying with MSS SP-80. Globe valves shall be installed where shown on the drawings for tight shutoff and shall be as follows: 1.2 in. and smaller: 150-lb. saturated steam, rising stem, bronze body meeting ASTM B62 bronze trim, stainless steel disc and seat, union bonnet with stuffing box. 2.Over 2 in.: 125-lb. saturated steam, flanged steel body and yoke bonnet meeting ASTM A126 Class B, rising stem with stuffing box and yoke bushing. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 0523-2 SECTION 23 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 3.Equip valves with packingsuitable for intended service. 4.Provide globe valves such that the back seating protects packing and stem threads form fluid when valve is fully opened. Equip valves with gland follower. 2.5CHECK VALVES A.Check valves for watershall be as follows unless otherwise shown on the drawings: 1.3 in. and smaller: 200-lb. saturated steam, swing type, threaded, bronze body meeting ASTM B62, pressure tight removable disc, hinge bumper to prevent sticking open, can be mounted horizontally or vertically. 2.Over 3 in.: 125-lb. saturated steam, swing check, flanged iron body meeting ASTM A126 Class B design to prevent disc sticking open, removable disc, bronze trimmed for steam or water, otherwise all iron construction. 3.Non-slam type for pump discharge duty –2-1/2 in. and larger: I.B.B.M., flanged, class 300, wafer style. 2.6BALL VALVES A.2 in. and smaller: ASTM B584 bronze body, 2-piece,full port stainless steelball, screwed or soldered ends with teflon seats and seals, blow out proof stem, tee or lever handle rated to 150 SWP/600W06. B.Over 2 in.: Carbon semi-steel or ductile iron body, 2-piece,full port stainless steelball, ANSI rated flanged ends with teflon seats and lever handle. 2.7BUTTERFLY VALVES A.Lined 1.Disc -Aluminum bronze ASTM B148 Class 9B or ASTM B584 Alloy 876 for chilled, heating and condenser water, air, and fuels. 2.Seat a.Hypalon ASTM D735-SC620A1 BF1JL for chemically treated water and water –10 F to +180F. 3.Stem -Stainless steel dry journal type QQ-S-763. 4.Bodies –Semi-steel; ASTM A126 Class B; cast iron, ASTM 448; ductile iron. ASTM A536; or cast steel, ASTM A216. On insulated piping, butterfly valves shall have extended neck suitable for 2 in. thick insulation. 5.Actuators -Lever handle with infinite position lever with positive locking feature on valve sizes 2 in. through 5 in. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 0523-3 SECTION 23 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 6.General Specifications. a.Butterfly valves may be of flanged, wafer, or lug type (lugs drilled and tapped). Grooved valve couplings may be used where grooved piping is applied. b.Elastomer seats shall be bonded to a rigid backupring, be field replaceable, and of the types listed above. c.The disc shall be aluminum bronze of the floating type with no external disc to stem fasteners. Drive is accomplished by a square stem engaging in a broached disc. d.Stems shall be stainless steel of the one-piece type, completely sealed from line flow. e.Working Pressures: 28 in. vacuum to 250 lb. working pressures, 300 lb. test, with bubble-tight end of line shutoff. f.Dead end service at full pressure without the need of a downstream flange. 2.8DRAIN VALVES (HOSE BIBBS) A.Soldered or Threaded Ends: Bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising stem, composition disc, 3/4 in. threaded hose outlet connection; 125 psi, maximum pressure rating. 2.9HANDWHEELS, OPERATORS, HANDLES, AND WRENCHES A.Provide suitable handwheels for gate, globe and drain valves. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1VALVE LOCATIONS -GENERAL A.Unless otherwise noted, shutoff valves shall be provided at all equipment connections (supply and return where applicable) for the following piping: pump suction and discharge, water, condensate, and drain lines (except on gravity drains from pans). Equipment connections include such items as coils, condensers, tanks, pumps, heat exchangers, and similar items. B.Check valves of the non-slam type shall be installed at the dischargeof pumps unless otherwise shown on the drawings. C.Install isolation valves at each branch off of horizontal mains and vertical risers. 3.2INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS A.Follow the manufacturer's recommended installation instructions concerning soldering, silver brazing, welding, threading, and installation of flanged valves in order to prevent damage to the valve and assure its maximum efficiency. Additional specific installation requirements are as follows: 1.Thread pipe for threaded valves to standard length only, using new block dies. 2.Put pipe compound on the pipe end, not into the valve threads. Securely screw pipe and valve together. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 0523-4 SECTION 23 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 3.Blow out or otherwise thoroughly clean pipe sections before they are installed. 4.Close valve before installation. 5.Secure and adjust valves for no leaks and for easy operation. 6.Install valves with stems horizontal or vertical above the pipe and square with building construction. 7.Install valves so piping does not place a stress or strain on the valve body. 8.Install extended-stem valves where insulation is indicated. Stems shall be extended such that the handle moves freely without contact with the insulation. 9.Install drain valves at low points of piping, at each mechanical equipment item, and elsewhere, where indicated. 10.Locate valves, cock, and hose bibbs to allow easy accessibility for operation, maintenance and repair. 11.Lugged butterfly valves with rubber-lined seats shall be installed with the disc(s) partially open. Bolts shall be torqued to the manufacturer'srecommendations. 3.3PROVISION FOR WRENCHES A.One operating wrench shall be provided for every 10 valves of each type not equipped with handwheels or levers. A minimum of two wrenches shall be provided for each type of valve. 3.4SPECIAL OPERATORS FOR 1/4 TURN PRODUCTS A.Special slow closing operators shall be provided for quick closing valves to prevent the destructive fluid action of "water hammer" effects. 1.Water: As recommended by the manufacturer. 3.5VALVE SCHEDULE Valve TypeService Globe -All SizesWater, for HVAC systems.Suitable for throttling service. Check -All SizesWater,air and steam for HVAC and piping systems. Ball -All Sizes Water for HVAC piping systems; for operation up to 200 psi at 500F. Butterfly -2 in. &Larger(Lined) Water for HVAC piping systems; for operation up to 200 psi at 500F. DrainHVAC systems. AutomaticHVAC and piping controls. Gate -All SizesSteam END OF SECTION 23 0523 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 0523-5 SECTION 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide equipment, materials, labor and supervision necessary to install pipe hangers and supports. B.Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction. C.Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. D.Where concrete inserts are to be used, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. 1.2REFERENCES A.American National Standards Institute, ANSI: 1.ANSI B31.1: Power Piping. B.Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, MSS, 1815North Fort Myer Drive, Arlington, VA 22209. 1.MSS SP-58: Pipe Hangers and Supports -Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2.MSS SP-69: Pipe Hangers and Supports -Selection and Application. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Submit manufacturer's product data. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Hangers and support devices shall be Grinnell, Fee and Mason, Michigan, B-Line or approved equivalent. Figure numbers based on Grinnell. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION -HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORTS A.Hanger rods for steel, wrought iron and brass pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: Pipe SizeRod DiameterMaximum Spacing Up to 1 ¼"3/8"8'-0" 1 ½"and 2"3/8"10'-0" 2 ½"and 3"½"10'-0" City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment 23 0529-1 SECTION 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Pipe SizeRod DiameterMaximum Spacing 4"and 5"5/8"12'-0" B.Hanger rods for copper pipe and tube shall beinstalled in accordance with the following schedule: Pipe SizeRod DiameterMaximum Spacing Up to 1"3/8"6'-8" 1¼"and 1½"3/8"8'-0" 2"3/8"9'-0" C.In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves and strainers. D.Where more than one pipe is to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Trapeze bar angles and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size to support the particular group of pipes. Trapeze hanger spacing shall be based on the smallest pipe on the rack. When hanging from light gauge metal trusses, coordinate pipe hanger spacing and hanger rod connection points with the truss manufacturer. E.For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls, use welded steel brackets; Fig. 194 for loads up to 750 lbs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 1500 lbs; Fig 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs. F.Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use "Unistrut"pipe racks. G.Attach all pipe hangers from support rods using double locknuts tightened to prevent loosening. 3.2INSTALLATION -VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS A.Support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting set on concrete or brick pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection closeto riser. B.Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below and support clamp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment. 3.3PIPE ATTACHMENTS A.For horizontal steel and wrought iron pipe, use carbon steel adjustable clevishanger, Fig. 260. For floor support or support directly above steel beams, use pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. B.For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper-plated malleable iron split pipe ring with turn buckle adjuster, Figs. CT-109 and 114 combined. C.Whenthermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of ½"axially, use adjustable swivel pipe roll, Fig. 174, or pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. D.For vertical, steelandwrought iron pipe, use extension pipe clamps, Fig. 261. E.For vertical copper pipe and tube, use copper-plated extension pipe clamp, Fig. CT-121. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment 23 0529-2 SECTION 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.4INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A.Hanger rods: use carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140, 141, 253, 254 as required. Continuous threaded rod: Fig. 146 may be used wherever possible. B.Chain wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe. 3.5STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A.For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete, use galvanized malleable iron concrete inserts; Fig. 282 for loads up to 1140 lbs. B.For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C-clamps; Fig. 87 with retaining clip for loads up to 500 lbs; Fig. 229 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C-clamps; Fig. CT-88 with hardened point cup set screw for loads up to 400 lbs. C.Vertical expansion shields or toggles shall not be used for suspending hanger rods, except with permission in cases where inserts have been omitted or cannot be used. If permitted, use expansion shields; Fig. 117 for rod sizes up to ½", 320 lbs. max. load. For larger rods use attachment plate, Fig. 52, with wedge anchors. D.Powder actuated anchoring methods shall not be used. 3.6PIPE COVERING PROTECTION A.Hangers and supports for insulated piping shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields in conjunction with hanger or roll device. Use Fig. 160 and 161, Protection Saddles, in cases where a vapor barrier is not required. Use Fig. 171 where a vapor barrier finish is required on the insulation. 3.7SUPPLEMENTAL STEEL A.Provide supplemental steel required to hang or supportmechanical equipment or piping. END OF SECTION 23 0529 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment 23 0529-3 SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide materials, equipment labor and supervision necessary to install piping identification products. B.Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length or color field, colors, and installed viewing angles of identification devices. 1.2QUALIFICATIONS A.W.H. Brady, Industrial Safety Supply, EMED Co., or Seton Nameplate. 1.3SCHEDULES A.Submit valve and damper schedule for each system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve and damper number, system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve and damper (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves and dampers that are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit manufacturer's product data. B.Submit sample of each type of identification product and clearly identify the contents in a schedule. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1PIPE MARKERS A.Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid snap-on or self-sticking, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. B.Provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location or self-sticking pipe markers, fastened in the following method: 1.Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2.Secure to piping and install banding tape on both ends of each pipe label. C.Lettering shall be manufacturer's pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance. D.Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic or on banding tape. E.Print each pipe and ductwork marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic or on banding tape. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Identification for HVAC Piping &Equipment 23 0553-1 SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.2EQUIPMENT MARKERS A.Provide engraved signage nameplates and tags constructed of multi-layered acrylic that has been treated for outdoor use and can withstand temperatures up to 160F. Nameplates shall have beveled edges with contrasting color core, letters, and border. Minimum size of nameplate shall be 2" high by 6" long. Attachment shall be by screws. For equipment that doesn't allow for direct attachment, furnish sheet metal backing to integrate with equipment such that signage can be read from 5 feet above the finished floor. Unless noted otherwise, signage shall be provided with black lettering, black border, and yellow core. All signage shall include up to 14 characters per line, minimum 3 lines per tag. Furnish signage for the following equipment: 1.All pumps shall include the full name description for system served such as "Hot Water Pump –1." 2.All filter sections shall be labeled with the exact quantity of filters, size, and type of filter such as "14 –24"x24"x2", 30% Pleated Filters." B.All equipment shall be named consistent with the plans and specifications as indicated on the schedules or as directed by the Owner. 2.3BRASS VALVE AND DAMPER TAGS A.Provide manufacturer's standard brass valve and dampertags with stamped black filled lettering, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. B.Provide 1-1/2" round brass tags with black lettering. Seton 250 BL or equal. 2.4VALVE AND DAMPERTAG FASTENERS A.Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain or solid brass S-hooks of sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valvesand dampers, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. 2.5VALVE AND DAMPERSCHEDULE FRAMES A.For each page of schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSD-grade sheet glass. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A.Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. B.Install pipe markers on each system, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Identification for HVAC Piping &Equipment 23 0553-2 SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C.Locate pipe markers as follows: wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) above lay-in type ceilings and exterior non-concealed locations. 1.Near each valve and control device. 2.Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures, mark each pipe at branch where there could be question of flow pattern. 3.Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, (both sides) or center non- accessible enclosures. 4.At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5.Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6.At each pipe passage to underground. 7.Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 8.On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run. 9.Where self-sticking labels are used, the pipe or its covering surface shall be properly prepared. This consists of removal of loose dirt, oil and grease, loose paint or peeling insulation covering. This can be done with a brush and cloth; washing is not required. Use solvent for removal of oil or grease. 10.Banding tape must be used on both ends of all self-sticking labels. The tape shall encircle the pipe completely and overlap itself so the banding tape can adhere to itself. D.Provide valve tags for all major valves 3/4" size or larger. Included are all main, zone and branch valves, valves in all equipment rooms, etc. All types of valves, ball, globe, butterfly, cocks, control, regulating, relief, reducing, solenoid, etc. are to be identified except check valves. Do not identify end use point valves for plumbing fixtures, and similar rough-in connections. E.Provide damper tags on all automatic control dampers, motorized dampers, and smoke dampers. F.List each tagged valve and damperin schedule for each system showing function and location. Provide separate charts for mechanical divisions of work. Charts shall be installed on a conspicuous wall in the main mechanical equipment room. Provide unframed copies of valve and damperlists as part of closeout documents. 3.2ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions. B.Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve schedules. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Identification for HVAC Piping &Equipment 23 0553-3 SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.3PIPING DUCTWORK, ANDEQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A.Piping systems that shall be identified by their controls (including directional arrows) on this project shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1.Heating Hot Water (supply and return). B.Equipment/Ductwork 1.Boilers 2.Air Separator. 3.Pumps. 4.Provide name plates forall equipment scheduled on the drawings. Coordinate nameplate tag with Owner's sequencing system. If the Owner has no preference, the nameplates shall correspond with the equipment schedule. END OF SECTION 23 0553 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Identification for HVAC Piping &Equipment 23 0553-4 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B.Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronicsystems. C.Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.2QUALIFICATIONS A.Testing and balancing shall be performed by an independent certified testing and balancing contractor. The Contractor shall be certified by AABC (American Association of Balancing Contractors), NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau), or SMARTA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning and Roofing Trade Association). The Balancing Contractor shall provide labor, services, and test equipment required to test, adjust, and balance the specified systems. Personnel involved in the execution of the work under the Balancing Contract shall be experienced and trained in the total balancing of mechanical systems, as well as being regular employees of the Balancing Contractor. 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of contract. B.Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. C.Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outline indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. D.Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. E.Provide reports in 3-ring bindermanuals,complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. F.Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance. G.Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms. 1.4SEQUENCING A.Sequence work to commence after completion of systems installation and schedule completion of balancing work before Substantial Completion of Project. B.Do not proceed with balancing work until systems scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing are clean and free from debris, dirt, and discarded building materials. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Testing, Adjusting, &Balancing for HVAC 23 0593-1 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC C.Completion of balancing work is requiredbefore Substantial Completion of Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1OTHER CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A.The Mechanical and Plumbing Contractors shall cooperate with the balancing agency by: 1.Including balancing dampers as required by the Drawings and Specifications. 2.Putting complete system into operation during duration of balancing period. 3.Providing up-to-date set of Drawings and advising immediately of changes made to the system during construction. 4.Providing labor and equipment and costof performing corrections such as dampers, belts, and pulley changes, etc. as required without undue delay. 5.Providing complete submittal information for mechanical equipment complete with pertinent engineering information. 3.2EXAMINATION A.Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions. 1.Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2.Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3.Proper thermal overload protection isin place for electrical equipment. 4.Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 5.Air handling unitleakage is minimized. 6.Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 7.Pumps are rotating correctly. 8.Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 9.Service and balance valves are open. B.Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance. C.Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Testing, Adjusting, &Balancing for HVAC 23 0593-2 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 3.3PREPARATION A.Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B.Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.4INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A.Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 of design for return and exhaust systems. B.Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.5ADJUSTING A.Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B.Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C.After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D.Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostat to specified settings. E.At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.6AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A.Adjust air handling system to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B.Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C.Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. D.Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowance for 50 percent loading of filters. 3.7WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES A.Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B.Use calibrated Venturitubes, orifices, or other meteredfittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Testing, Adjusting, &Balancing for HVAC 23 0593-3 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC C.Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D.Effect system balance with automatic controlvalves fully open to heat transfer elements. E.Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. F.Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. G.Three way valves shall be tested and balanced for flow capacities at full coil flow and full bypass flow, as indicated on the drawings or at a maximum coil flow, whichever is less. H.Provide assistance to the hydronic pumps’ VFD startup technician for calibration of design flow with VFD’s. 3.8SCHEDULES A.Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1.HVAC Pumps 2.Air Coils 3.AHU's B.Report Forms 1.Title Page: a.Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b.Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency c.Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d.Project name e.Project location f.Project Architect g.Project Engineer h.Project Contractor i.Project altitude j.Report date City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Testing, Adjusting, &Balancing for HVAC 23 0593-4 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 2.Summary Comments: a.Design versus final performance b.Notable characteristics of system c.Description of systems operation sequence d.Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amountof building pressurization e.Nomenclature used throughout report f.Test conditions 3.Instrument List: a.Instrument b.Manufacturer c.Model number d.Serial number e.Range f.Calibration date 4.Electric Motors: a.Manufacturer b.Model/Frame c.HP/BHP d.Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate,actual, no load e.RPM f.Service factor g.Starter size, rating, heater elements h.Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5.V-Belt Drive: a.Identification/location b.Required driven RPM City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Testing, Adjusting, &Balancing for HVAC 23 0593-5 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC c.Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d.Belt, size and quantity e.Motor sheave diameter and RPM f.Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 6.Pump Data: a.Identification/number b.Manufacturer c.Size/model d.Impeller e.Service f.Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP g.Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP h.Discharge pressure i.Suction pressure j.Total operatinghead pressure k.Shut off, discharge and suction pressures l.Shut off, total head pressure 7.Heating Coil Data: a.Identification/number b.Location c.Service d.Manufacturer e.Air flow, design and actual f.Water flow, design and actual g.Water pressure drop, design and actual h.Entering water temperature, design and actual City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Testing, Adjusting, &Balancing for HVAC 23 0593-6 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC i.Leaving water temperature, design and actual j.Entering air temperature, design and actual k.Leaving air temperature, design and actual l.Air pressure drop, design and actual m.Coils with 3 way control valves shall have flow measured at full coil flow and full bypass flow. The bypass balancing valve shall be adjusted for flow as indicated on the drawings or at a maximum coil flow, whichever is less. 8.Air Moving Equipment a.Location b.Manufacturer c.Model number d.Serial number e.Arrangement/Class/Discharge f.Air flow, specified and actual g.Return air flow, specified and actual h.Outside air flow, specified and actual i.Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual j.Inlet pressure k.Discharge pressure l.Sheave Make/Size/Bore m.Number of Belts/Make/Size n.Fan RPM 9.Duct Traverse: a.System zone/branch b.Duct size c.Area d.Design velocity City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Testing, Adjusting, &Balancing for HVAC 23 0593-7 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC e.Design air flow f.Test velocity g.Test air flow h.Duct static pressure i.Air temperature j.Air correction factor END OF SECTION 230593 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Testing, Adjusting, &Balancing for HVAC 23 0593-8 SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide equipment, materials, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to hot and cold surfaces of piping, tanks, ductwork, fittings and other surfaces. B.Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.2CODES AND STANDARDS A.Insulating materials, jackets and mastics shall meet flame spread, fuel contribution and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA-90A. Flame spread rating in accordance with NFPA 255, ASTM E-84 or UL 723 of not more than 25; smoke developed rating of not more than 50, unless otherwise noted in this section. B.Insulation that has been treated with a flame-retardant additive to meet the flame spread and smoke developed ratings shown above is not permitted. C.Insulation materials shall be noncorrosive to the materials they are applied to, including stress corrosion cracking of stainless steel, and shall not breed or promote fungus and bacteria. D.Insulation shall meet or exceed all requirements of ASHRAE/IES 90.1. 1.3QUALIFICATION A.Insulating materials by Owens-Corning, Armstrong, Pittsburgh-Corning, Knauf, Rubatex, Schuller, CertainTeed Manson, Pabco, Thermacor or approved equivalent. B.Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, flame spread and smoke development rating, k-value, density, temperature limitations, sound absorption coefficients, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1INSULATION A.Description 1.Type A: Preformed, sectional, heavy density fiberglass insulation, suitable for operating temperatures form –20F to +850F. Equipped with factory-applied, all-service vapor barrier jacket constructed of white Kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn, with pressure-sensitive, self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 2 Thermal conductivity of 0.23 BTU-in/hr-ft-F @ 75F mean temperature. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 HVAC Insulation 23 0700-1 SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION Water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Schuller "Micro-Lok AP-T"or approved equivalent. 2.Type B: Flexible, elastomeric pipe and sheet insulation with expanded, closed-cell structure. Suitable for operating temperatures from –40F to 220F. Outdoor applications, and where otherwise noted, shall receive a weather-resistant, protective, vinyl-lacquer finish. Thermal 2 conductivity of 0.28 BTU-in/hr-ft-F @ 75F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Insulation shall be equivalent to Armstrong AP Armaflex; adhesive equivalent to Armstrong 520; finish equivalent to Armstrong WB Armaflex finish. 3.Type H: Rigid fiberglass board formed from inorganic glass fibers bonded with thermosetting fibers, 3.0 PCF, with factory applied all service jacketsuitable for operating 2 temperature of –20F to +450F. Thermal conductivity of 0.23 BTU-in/hr-ft-F @ 75F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Knauf "Insulation Board" or approved equivalent. 2.2INSULATION JACKETS A.20-mil high impact PVC secured with spray contact adhesive. All PVC jacketing shall meet the 25/50 SDR. Manville "Zeston 2000"or equivalentfor piping systems. B.Provide reusable insulated wraps for unions, strainers, autoflowvalves, circuit setters, check valves and other components and appurtances. 1.Provide with insulation values (i.e. thickness) consistent with insulation specified for associated piping service. Valve wrap shall be provided in sufficient length to completely conceal all integral components including 2"minimum overlap on pipe at each end. 2.Wraps shall be No Sweatreusable wraps (www.valvewraps.com) or approved equivalent. 3.Wraps shall be sized and installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 4.Ensure locations of all wrapped components are clearly identified on mechanical contractors' record drawings. C.At wall penetrations provide an additional jacket of 0.020 inch thick smooth finish aluminum.Metal jacket shall have factory applied moisture barrier. Fitting and valve covers to be preformed of same material as adjacent metal jacket. D.Where PVC or metal jackets are used, delete the factory applied ASJ on pipe and equipment operating above 75F. E.PVC jackets shall be usedin the following areas and systems: 1.Whenever piping is routed exposed through occupied spaces. 2.Exposed piping. 3.Pre-molded PVC at all fittings and valve jackets. 4. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 HVAC Insulation 23 0700-2 SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged inthe trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulation materials supplier's recommendations, except where a higher standard is specified. B.Install materials after systems have been tested and approved. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed form surfaces to be insulated. C.Insulation shall be kept clean and dry at all times. D.Where pipes and ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, a fire seal shall be provided. E.When flexible cellular insulation is used, it shall be installed with seams and joints sealed with contact adhesive. 1.Wherever possible, the insulation shall be placed over the pipe before it is installed. Seal the butt joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive, or equal. 2.Where the insulation cannot be slipped on, cut the insulation longitudinally and apply it to the piping. Seal longitudinal seam and butt joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive, or equal. In all cases, the insulation, equal to Armstrong Rigid Armaflex,protected with half-round PVC sleeves the length of three times the nominal pipe size, minimum length to be 8 inches. 3.2PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A.Provide reusable insulated wraps for unions, strainers, autoflow valves, circuit setters, check valves and components integral to heat pump hose kits as well as other equipment systems. 1.Provide with insulation values (i.e. thickness) consistent with insulation specified for associated piping service. Valve wrap shall be provided in sufficient length to completely conceal all integral components including 2"minimum overlap on pipe at each end. 2.Wraps shall be No Sweatreusable wraps (www.valvewraps.com) or approved equivalent. 3.Wraps shall be sized and installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 4.Ensure locations of all wrapped components are clearly identified on mechanical contractors' record drawings. B.Pipe insulation shall continue through sleeves and hangers with vapor barrier and/or jacket. C.Insert to be between support shield and piping but under the finish jacket. Provide an insert at hangers not less than 6"long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 HVAC Insulation 23 0700-3 SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION D.Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. 1.On hot systems where fittings are to be left exposed, insulation ends shall be beveled away from bolts for easy access. 2.On cold systems, valve stems shall be sealed with caulking which allows free movement of the stem, but provides a seal against moisture incursion. 3.3EQUIPMENT INSULATION A.Do not insulate factory-insulated equipment. B.Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring and beveling insulation, if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires or bands. C.Fill joints, cracks, seams and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement. D.Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with ¼"coat of insulating cement applied in two 1/8" layers, if non-faced insulation is used. E.Do not insulate over nameplate orASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such. F.When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance, repair or cleaning such as at manway covers or strainer plugs, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage. Removable insulation shall have a vapor-proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. G.Joints shall be sealed with 2"wide vapor barrier tape or strips to match insulation jacket, using a fire- resistive adhesive. 3.4DUCT LINER APPLICATION A.Apply duct liner with coat or surface designed to be exposed, facing the air stream and adhered with 100% coverage of fire-retardant adhesive. When width exceeds 12" or height exceeds 24", additionally secure liner with mechanical fasteners spaced on 12" maximum centers. Fasteners shall start within 3" of leading edge of transverse joints. Coat exposed joints and edges of transverse joints with a fire-retardant adhesive. B.Apply apparatus casing liner same as item A above and apply ½" mesh galvanized, 16 gauge wire over the entire surface and fasten with speed washers. C.Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions, and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct lining. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 HVAC Insulation 23 0700-4 SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION 3.5DUCTCOVERING APPLICATION A.Covering shall be cut slightly longer than circumference of duct to ensure full thickness at corners. Insulation shall be applied with edges tightly banded, and shall be adhered to duct with fire-resistant adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied so that insulation conforms to duct surfaces uniformly and firmly. B.In addition to the adhesive, the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of ducts 18"or wider by means of welded pins and speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush after the speed clips have been applied. The vapor barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed with a vapor barrier mastic and tape where the pins have pierced through. The vapor barrier shall be continuous to prevent condensation. Insulation shall not be compressed at any location so as to reduce insulating characteristics. C.Joints shall be sealed with 2"wide pressure-sensitive tape or vapor barrier tape or strips, using a fire- resistive adhesive. Cuts or tears shall be sealed with strips of vapor barrier jacket applied with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 3.6PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE INSULATION SERVICETYPETHICKNESSPIPE SIZES Steam, steamcondensate, pumped A2"All pipe sizes discharge Heating WaterA1½"Up to 1½" pipe size 2"2" and up Chilled waterA1½"All pipe sizes 3.7EQUIPMENT INSULATIONSCHEDULE SERVICETYPETHICKNESS Air Separators < 28"DiameterB2" Steam condensate pumpH3" END OF SECTION 23 0700 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 HVAC Insulation 23 0700-5 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide materials, labor, and supervision necessary to furnish and install a Direct Digital Control (DDC) system. The DDC system herein specified shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package by the Direct Digital Control Manufacturer. The system shall include all computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, automation sensors and controls, wiring, piping, installation, supervision and labor, calibration, adjustments and check out necessary for a complete and fully operational system. B.General Description: 1.The DDC control system shall include all points described and/or indicated in this project and shall be capable of point expansion in the future; future expansion shall not be limited to less than 1000 additional points of control. The DDC system shall be BACnet compatible, utilizing an operator workstation at the LAN (local IP at building) level; this LAN shall be sufficient to operate this building’s systems as a stand alone, with the future option to connect to a District WAN to allow remote or supervisory control from a District central office. All components on IP subnets (field busses) shall support MS/TP architecture,allow full and complete migration to a future WAN with full functionality and communication both with and without the building controller. 2.Controls system shall interface with existing web-basedTranecontrol system at City High School. 1.2QUALIFICATIONS A.Thecontrol system shall meet specifications and qualifications as described. The controls contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience associated with variable air volume systems, hot water systems, constant volume systems and other systems as required by the sequence of operations. B.The temperature controls system allowed on this project shall be the following: 1.Trane C.All work is to be installed by a qualified person skilled in the installation of electronic automatic control systems. The control contractor is responsible for the proper installation of the control system. 1.The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System Manufacturer of not less than three years. 2.The installer shall have a service office within 50miles of the project site and provide 24- hour response in the event of a customer call. D.The contractor may elect to subcontract the installation of the electronic control system but will be responsible in total as outlined above. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-1 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC E.All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner's representative in writing prior to bid date. Spareand replacementparts shall be available for at least 10 years after completion of this contract. 1.3WORK BY OTHERS A.The following incidental work shall be furnished by the Division 15 Contractor under the supervision of this Contractor. 1.Install automatic valves and separable wells. 2.Furnish and install all necessary valves, pressure taps, flow meters, water, drain and overflow connections and piping. 3.Furnish and install all necessary piping connections required for flow devices, valve position indicators, etc. 4.Install all automatic dampers and minimum outdoor air stations, airflow stations. 5.Provide necessary blank-off plates (safing) required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. 6.Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. 7.Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation and affix and seal permanently in place only after stratification problem has been eliminated. 8.Provide access door or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment. 1.4DESCRIPTION A.Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for control of mechanical systems on this project. B.The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall have access to all valid system data. An operator shall be able to log onto any workstation on the control system and have access to all appropriate data. C.The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-2 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC D.Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the panel identifier or location to view or control an object. Application Specific Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the network controllers to update point information and alarm information. E.The documentation is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and software necessary to implement the functions and sequences shown. 1.5SUBMITTALS A.Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers' standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until submittals have been reviewed by the Engineer and Owner for conformity with the plan and specifications. All shop drawings shall be done on AutoCAD, and provided to the Engineer for review and to the Owner. B.Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion. C.Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the system to be installed. D.Submit the following within 30 days of contract award: 1.A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and model number. 2.A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location. 3.Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include: a.Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers, and Application Specific Controllers b.Operator Work Station c.Auxiliary Control Devices d.Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations, addresses, and cabling. e.Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations. Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-3 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC f.Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names. g.Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific for the use of the Control System being provided for this project. h.Provide a BACnet Product Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each BACnet device type in the submittal. E.Project Record Documents: Upon completion of installation submit five (5) copies of record (as- built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and include: 1.Project Record Drawings -These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of magnetic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall also be provided. 2.Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual -These shall be as-built versions of the submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual shall include: a.Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each. b.Operators Manual with procedures of operating the control systems including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables. c.Programming Manual with a description of the programming language including syntax, statement descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor. d.Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Manual(s) that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware. e.A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the software and database shall also be provided. f.A list of recommended spare parts with part numbers and supplier. g.Complete original issue documentation, installation and maintenance information for all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors. h.Complete original issue diskettes for all software provided including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-4 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC i.Licenses, Guarantee, and Warrantee documents for all equipment and systems. j.Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a schedule of tasks (inspection, cleaning, calibration, etc.), time between tasks, and task descriptions. F.Training Manuals: The Contractor shall provide a course outline and training manuals for all training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. The Owner reserves the right to modify any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner and Engineer and shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class. 1.6CODES ANDSTANDARDS A.Input/output devices, specified or future, associated with the DDC control system shall be ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) coded with standard EIA (Electronic Industries Association) interface hardware. B.Wiring performed by the DDC Contractor shall be installed in accordance with all applicable local, state, and national codes. C.Instrumentation hardware shall be supplied to directly interface with Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standards. D.Meet requirements of all applicable standards and codes, except when more detailed or stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents, including requirements of this Section. 1.Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed. 2.National Electrical Code -NFPA 70. 3.Federal Communications Commission -Part J. 1.7WARRANTY A.Labor and materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twenty-four (24) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours. B.At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of warranty. C.Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-5 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 1.8OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL A.All project developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are not limited to: Project graphic images, record drawings, project database, job-specific application programming code and all documentation. 1.9SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A.Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following: 1.Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be 30 seconds. Analog objects shall start to adjust within 30seconds. 2.Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation will be current, within the prior 60 seconds. 3.Alarm Response Time.The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds. 4.Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control. 5.Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency from at least once every 5 seconds. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency. 6.Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within 5 seconds of each other. 7.ReportingAccuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all values reported by the specified system. TABLE I --REPORTING ACCURACY Measured VariableReported Accuracy U.N.O Space temperature±1ºF Ducted air±2ºF Outside air±2ºF Water temperature±1ºF Delta-T±0.25ºF Relative humidity±5% RH Water flow±5% of full scale Air flow (terminal)±10% of reading *Note1 Air flow (measuring stations)±5% of reading Air pressure (ducts)±0.1" W.G. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-6 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC TABLE I --REPORTING ACCURACY Measured VariableReported Accuracy U.N.O Water pressure±2% of fullscale *Note 2 Electrical power5% of reading Carbon dioxide (co2)±20 PPM Note 1: 10%-100% of scale Note 2: for both absolute and differential pressure PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1SUPERVISED TRAINING A.Provide four(4) hours of supervised training for up to four (4)of the Owner's representatives simultaneously to include system operation, programming, report generation, and construction of graphics. Training shall take place at the project site during the normal work hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. weekdays. Training shall include: 1.Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals. 2.Walk-through of the job to locate control components. 3.Operator workstation and peripherals. 4.DDC custom application controllers, ASC, TEC, SAC operation and function. 5.Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel programming. 6.Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures. B.Provide operator orientation to the overall operational program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system), commands, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention required in responding to the systems operation. An Owner's manual prepared for this project by the DDC manufacturer shall be used in addition to the instruction. Five copies of the Owner's manual shall be provided. C.The technical training will also include adequate instruction and documentation to enable maintenance staff to trouble shoot, repair, and maintain entire system and recreate all programming without factory assistance. D.The technical training will also include adequate instruction and documentation to allow expansion by the maintenance staff of the system in the future to interface with existing pneumatic, electric, and electronic control systems. This would include activities associated with hardware and software. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-7 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2.2COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEM A.The Temperature Control Contractor shall verify that each analog and binary device and operator responds correctly to the signal given at the control panel by physically changing each parameter and witnessing the correct corresponding reaction. The results of this testing shall be logged in a written report and submitted to the Owner and Engineer prior to final payment. B.The Owner's representative shall witness thecommissioning of the system. 2.3SYSTEM SOFTWARE A.Operating System. Furnish a commercially available, concurrent multi-tasking operating system. The operating system shall also support the use of other common software applications that operate under DOS or Microsoft Windows. Examples include Lotus 123, Microsoft Excel, Word Perfect, and Paradox. Acceptable operating systems are Windows NT, Windows 95 (or later version), Unix, and OS/2. B.System Graphics. The Operator Workstation software shall be graphically oriented and capable of thematic display. The system shall allow display of up to 10 graphic screens at once for comparison and monitoring of system status. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between graphic displays and change the sizeand location of graphic displays on the screen. The system graphics shall be able to be modified while on line. An operator with the proper password level shall be able to add, delete, or change dynamic points on a graphic. Dynamic points shall includeanalog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files. Graphics shall have the ability to show animation by shifting image files based on the status of the point. 1.Custom Graphics. Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of a graphics generation package furnished with the system. The graphics generation package shall be a graphically based system that uses the mouse to create and modify graphics that are saved in industry standard formats such as PCX, TIFF, and GEM. The graphics generation package shall also provide the capability of capturing or converting graphics from other programs such as Designer, or AutoCAD. 2.Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, unit heaters, fan coils, and unit ventilators. This library shall also include standard symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package program. All individual pieces of equipment shall be graphically represented with input and output values (both binary and analog). 3.Engineering Units. Allow for selection of the desired engineering units in the system. Unit selection shall be able to be customized by locality to select the desired units for each measurement. Engineering units on this project shall be Standard Inch Pound. 2.4SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A.Each workstation shall provide operator interface and off-line storage of system information. Provide the following applications at each workstation. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-8 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 1.Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation shall store on the hard disk a copy of the current database of each building controller. This database shall be updated whenever a change is made in any panel in the system. The storage of this data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database loss in a building management panel, the first workstation to detect the loss shall automatically restore the database for that panel. 2.Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be able to archive the database from any system panel and store on magnetic media. The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system. 3.System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a graphical method of configuring the system. The user with proper security shall be able to add new devices, assign modems to devices, and obtain a visual riser diagram of the system. This shall allow for future system changes or additions. 4.On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. 5.Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator's access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of thesystem if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto logoff time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. 6.Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, states, and reactions for each object in the system. a.Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to determine what actions, if any, are to be taken, by object (or point), during an alarm. Actions shall include logging, printing, starting programs, displaying messages, dialing out to remote stations, paging, providing audible annunciation or displaying specific system graphics. Each of these actions shall be configurable by workstation and time of day. An object in alarm that has not been acknowledged within an operator specified time period shall be re-routed to an alternate operator specified alarm receipt device. b.Binary Alarms. Each binary object shall be set to alarm based on the operator specified state. Provide the capability to disable alarming when the associated equipment is turned off or is being serviced. c.Analog Alarms. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits and warning limits. Alarming must be able to be automatically and manually disabled. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-9 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 7.Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a custom trend log for any data in the system. This definition shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. Trend intervals of 1, 5, 15, 30, and 60 minutes as well as once a shift (8 hours), once a day, once a week, and once a month shall be selectable. All trends shall start based on the hour. Each trend shall accommodate up to 64 system objects. The system operator with proper password shall be able to determine how many samples are stored in each trend. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller panel and be archived on the hard disk. Trend data shall be able to be viewed and printed from the operator interface software. They shall also be storable in a tab delimited ASCII format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet packages. a.The initial trend log setup shall give the operator a room by room option to trend log the input and output devices associated with each terminal box (VAV box). This would include, but not be limited to, space temperature, cfm, and fan operation. 8.Alarm and Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and events from any location in the system. Events shall be listed chronologically. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard disk on the workstation. 9.Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator with proper password protection to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. These statuses shall be available by menu, on graphics, or through custom programs. 10.Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in all building control panels and workstations shall be synchronized on command of an operator. The system shall also be able to automatically synchronize all system clocks, daily from any operator designated device in the system. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings and standard time if applicable. 11.Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select, modify, or create reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. Report data shall be archived on the hard disk for historical reporting. Provide the ability for the operator to obtain real time logs of designated lists of objects. Reports and logs shall be storedon the PC hard disk in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. a.Custom Reports: Provide the capability for the operator to easily define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. These reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report title and the name of the facility. B.Workstation Applications Editors. Each PC workstationshall support full screen editing of all system applications. Provide editors for each application at the PC workstation. The applications shall be downloaded and executed at the appropriate controller panels. 1.Controller. Provide a full screen editor for each type controller and application, that shall allow the operator with proper password to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters, and system set-points. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-10 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2.Scheduling. An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each workstation. Provide a monthly calendar for each schedule. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar. Provide a method for allowing several related objects to follow a schedule. The advance and delay time for each object shall be adjustable from this master schedule. a.An operator with proper password level shall be able to modify the schedule. Schedules shall be able to be easily copied between objects and/or dates. b.Occupied/Unoccupied schedules shall be individually adjustable for each terminal unit. The user shall be able to easily change the schedule of rooms, etc. An occupied space shall automatically start the unit in normal start up mode. 3.Equipment Coordination. Provide a full screen editor that allows equipment to be grouped for proper operation as specified in the sequence of operations. This shall include the coordination of VAV boxes with their associated Air Handling Equipment. 4.Custom Application Programming. Provide the tools to create, modify, and debug custom application programming. The operator shall be able to create, edit, and download custom programs at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be fully operable while custom routines are edited, compiled, and downloaded. The programming language shall have the following features: a.The language shall be English language oriented and be based on the syntax of programming languages such as BASIC. It shall allow for free form or fill in the blank programming. Alternatively, the programming language can be graphically- based using function blocks as long as blocks are available that directly provide the functions listed below, and that custom or compound function blocks can be created. b.A full screen character editor/programming environment shall be provided. The editor shall be cursor/mouse-driven and allow the user to insert, add, modify, and delete code from the custom programming. It shall also incorporate word processing features such as cut/paste and find/replace. c.The programming language shall allow independently executing program modules to be developed. Each module shall be able to independently enable and disable other modules. d.The editor/programming environment shall have a debugging/simulation capability that allows the user to step through the program and to observe any intermediate values and or results. The debugger shall also provide error messages for syntax and execution errors. e.The programming language shall support conditional statements (IF/THEN/ELSE/ELSE-IF) using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and/or relations (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-11 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC f.The programming language shall support floating point arithmetic using the following operators: +, -, /, x, square root, and xy. The following mathematical functions shall also be provided: natural log, log, absolute value, and minimum/maximum value from a list of values. g.The programming language shall have pre-defined variables that represent clock time, day of the week, and date. Variables that provide interval timing shall also be available. The language shall allow for computations using these values. h.The programming language shall have ability to pre-defined variables representing the status and results of the System Software, and shall be able to enable, disable, and change the values of objects in the system. 2.5POWER FAIL RESTART A.In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of the digital panels and workstation to prevent the loss of data base or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery backup shall be provided to support theclock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. B.Upon restoration of normal power, the panels shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. C.Should Digital panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the panel via the local RS-232 port, or telephone line dial-in. 2.6SYSTEM SOFTWARE A.Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers.Editing of applications shall occur at the operator workstation. B.System Security 1.User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. 2.Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager. 3.User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded. 4.The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable. C.Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, night setback, and economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events.When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-12 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 1.Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Provide separate scheduling that is easily edited by the operator to define the occupied hours for each area. 2.Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week. a.Specifically label and program “snow day” to keep the building in the unoccupied mode with the option to set back the temperature or to bring it up to the occupied set- point. 3.Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period. 4.Optimal Start/Stop. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start/stop algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start/stop algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before anoperator determined time limit. D.Alarm Reporting. The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the appropriate workstations based on time and other conditions. An alarm shall be able to start programs, be logged in the event log, printed, generate custom messages and display graphics. E.Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to dial out in the event of an alarm. Receivers shall include PC Workstations. The alarm message shall include the name of the calling location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access and operate the system using dial up communications. F.Maintenance Management. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon user designated run time, starts, and/or calendar date limits. 2.7BUILDING CONTROLLERS A.General. Provide Building Controllers to provide the performance specified in this section. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1.The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand- alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies described in System software section. 2.The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-13 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 3.The controller shall provide a communications port for connection of a Portable Operators Terminal. 4.The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 5.Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers. 6.The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: a.Assume a predetermined failure mode. b.Generate an alarm notification. B.Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for operation at 32° F to 120° F. C.Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. D.Memory. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. E.Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage. 2.8CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS A.General. Provide BACnetAdvanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) to provide the performance specified in this specification. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1.The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand- alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the local strategies described in System software section. 2.The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 3.The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 4.Data shall be shared between networked Controllers. 5.The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-14 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC a.Assume a predetermined failure mode. b.Generate an alarm notification. B.Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for theanticipated ambient conditions. 1.Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA Type 4 waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at –40° F to 150° F. 2.Controllers used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32° F to 120° F. C.Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. D.Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. E.Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominalvoltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage. 2.9APPLICATION SPECIFICCONTROLLERS A.General. Provide BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC), microprocessor-based DDC controllers which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve. 1.Each B-ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. 2.Each B-ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. B.Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1.Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA Type 4 waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at –40° F to 150° F. 2.Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32° F to 120° F. C.Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, and communications. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. D.Memory. TheApplication Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-15 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC E.Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80%. F.Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type. 2.10COMMUNICATIONS A.The controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for the inter-network. B.All Building Controllers shall have a communications port for connections with the operator interfaces. C.Communications services over the inter-network shall result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the inter-network architecture as follows: 1.Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the inter-network will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one controller on the inter-network. 2.All database values (i.e. points, software variable, custom program variables) of any one controller shall be readable by any other controller on the inter-network. This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a point name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform inter-network value passing. D.The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily. 2.11INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE A.Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or Application Specific Controllers. B.All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller. C.Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals or from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 ma to be compatible with commonly available control devices. D.Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shallconform to all the requirements of Binary Input points, and also accept up to 2 pulses per second for pulse accumulation, and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-16 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC E.Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 ma), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices. F.Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation, or a pulsed low voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation. G.Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0-10 Vdc or a 4-20 ma signal asrequired to provide proper control of the output device. 2.12AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES A.Electronic damper/valve actuators. 1.The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. Furnish a separate damper actuator for each damper greater than 48” in any dimension. 2.Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. 3.All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise spring return operation. Linearactuators shall spring return to the retracted position. 4.Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 ma operating range. 5.All 24 VAC/DC actuators shall not require more than 10 VA for AC or more than 8 W for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120 VAC or 230 VAC shall not require more than 11 VA. 6.All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose. 7.All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction of rotation. 8.Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections. 9.Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed. 10.Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque. Actuators shall include a stroke limiting device. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-17 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC B.Control Valves 1.Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service as scheduled, shown, or as indicated in the sequence of operation. 2.Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings: a.Water Valves: 1)Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head. 2)Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or 100% of total system (pump) head. 3.Water Valves: a.Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service. b.Sizing Criteria: 1)Two-position service: Line size. 2)Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to the pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply and return mains, or a maximum of 4 psi. 3)Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250, spring loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two- way valves to have replaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball. 4)2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and Teflon packing. 4.General a.Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as follows: 1)Heating coils-normally open. 2)Other applications -as scheduled or as required by sequence of operation. b.Control valves at terminal units shall be non-spring return. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-18 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC C.Sensors: 1.Room and duct humidity sensors shall be of the thin film capacitance type containing a humidity sensitive material that modifies its dielectric constant to maintain accuracy of +5% RH @ 77° F, range of 20% to 95% RH, including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability. The sensor shall be rated for operation between 15 to 170 degrees F. 2.All temperature and humidity sensors shall be of the electronic type. The temperature sensors shall be resistance temperature device (RTD) or thermistor type. a.Room sensorsshall be Trane. b.Room sensors shall include covers for horizontal or vertical mounting and concealed adjustments. Sensors shall include adjustable slide temperature sensors, and two-hour push button override. All wall sensors located on exterior walls or surfaces that will cause abnormal sensor readings shall be furnished with an insulated base. c.Room sensors shall have a range of 32-120 degrees F with a factory calibration of 74° F. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1degree F at calibration point. Mounting height of room sensors shall be verified with owner prior to installation. d.Duct Temperature Sensors -accuracy of +1° F @ 77 deg F. Duct air sensors shall be duct single point, averaging probe or averaging bulb as required under sequence of operation. e.Use insertion elements with a brass well with a minimum length of 2.5" f.Outside air sensor shall have watertight inlet fitting and contain a shield from direct sunlight. 3.Duct pressure sensors shall be compatible for use in HVAC air distribution or air handling systems and shall have an accuracy of plus or minus .1" w.g. Sensors shall have an operating temperature range from 0-175° F and 10-90% relative humidity. Sensors shall be Mamac Systems or approved equal. D.Current Sensing Relays -shall be split core type with adjustable high and low trip settings. Range shall not exceed 175% of expected input. Coordinate special requirements for systems with variable speed drives. E.Flow Switches 1.Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type for proof of flow application. 2.Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-19 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 3.Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, solid state, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA Type 1 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as specified. Mercoid type switches shall not be used for equipment that vibrates such as chillers, etc. Differential pressure switches shall be by Orange Research or approved equal. 4.Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices. F.Relays 1.Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. 2.Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosure when not installed in local control panel. G.Transformers and Power Supplies 1.Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service. 2.Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current output shall allow for a 50%safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peak-to-Peak. Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection. 3.Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50° C. 4.Unit shall be UL recognized. H.Local Control Panels 1.All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA Type 1 construction with hinged door, key-lock latch, removable sub-panels. A single key shall be common to all field panels and sub-panels. 2.Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control termination's for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings. 3.Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection and main air gauge for control power sources to each local panel. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-20 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC I.Auxiliary Devices 12.Furnish and install all necessary auxiliary electronic devices as appropriate to accomplish the sequence as specified. These totally electronic devices shall include (but not be limitedto) such items as load-limiting controllers, low signal selectors, high signal selectors, remote reset control devices, floating alarm units, staging networks, damper position indicators, unison amplifiers, reversing networks, sequencing networks and electronic power supplies. J.Smoke Detectors 1.The smoke detectors for air handling units shall be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor. 2.13VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES A.Variable speed drives shall be providedand installedby the electrical contractor. 2.14WIRING A.All electric wiring required for the control system and any interlock wiring required for the controls sequence shall be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor. B.All inaccessible line voltage and low voltage control wiring, including wiring in walls, above gypsum ceilings shall be run in conduit. Wiring routed above accessible ceilings may be open cable, provided it is supported per NEC and is routed plumb with adjacent walls, and is plenum rated where applicable. C.Wire shall be a minimum of #18 gauge, color-coded, stranded wire for all low voltage, electronic circuit with "spares" installed (one for every group of 10 wires) in conduit. D.Coordinate the requirements for 120V circuits for the ASC's. All control transformers shall be the responsibility of this contractor. Reference the electrical drawings for circuit locations. 2.15SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A.General 1.All HVAC equipment control points recognized by the controllers, both factory and field installed, shall be integrated into the new BAS for full control and manipulation via the central computer at City High School. 2.Control points (i.e. Indications, Adjustments, Alarms, faults, remote reset, etc.) as identified shall be provided as equipment manufacturer's factory options. Where the specifieditem is not available as a factory option, the equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with the TCC to provide. All non-factory option solutions shall be highlighted within the shop drawing submittals of both the equipment manufacturer and the TCC. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-21 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC B.Exhaust Fan(EF-1)-A motorized damper thefan shall be controlled so that the damper is closed when the fan is de-energized and open when the fan is energized. The fan shall not start until the respective damper is proven open. Provide all interconnecting wiring. The fans shall be controlled as follows: 1.Fanshall be controlled by atemperature sensor in the space. 2.Provide the following indications (I) and adjustments (A) for Exhaust fans at the operator work station. (*) Indicates critical alarm point. Alarms for fans shall be signaled if the fan is de-energized and the controls call for the fan to be energized. a.Fan start/stop (I, A) b.Fan status (I) c.Space temperature (I,A) C.Heating Hot Water Plant 1.The heating system consists of two new hot water boilers and two main distribution pumps with variable speed drives. a.Main distribution pumps (P-1 and P-2): Each pump shall be controlled by a dedicated variable speed drive; VFD's furnished and installed by Division 26. In the auto mode, either pump shall be designated as the standby pump. Provide a pump sequencer program to allow manual and automatic switchover between the lead and standby pumps to equalize run time. If the lead pump should fail, the flow switch shall alert the BAS and energize time delay relay. If the flow is interrupted for more than 20 seconds (adjustable), the BAS shall simultaneously de-energize the lead pump, energize the standby pump, and activate an alarm. The variable speed drive shall control the speed of the pump in response to a static pressure controller located two-thirds of the distance to the furthest air handling unit. b.A3-way valve isintended to ensure adequate flow in the system during low-load periods. Here, low-load represents building load requiring less flow than results at minimum VFD setting (i.e. 10-15%; verify with Division 26 for specific parameters of selected VFD's). Upon any call for space conditioning during low-load, the three- way valveat HC-2shall modulate to bypass sufficient flow to maintain VFD's minimum flow.Once the VFD speed increases above minimum (plus an adjustable deadband), the 3-way valve shall modulate down to minimize flow in bypass, ensuring sufficient flow to the reheat coil. c.Hot Water Boilers: The packaged boiler control system shall control each boilers and respective circulating pumps to maintain the supply water temperature set point. The temperature controls contractor shall provide sequencing of the boilers as required. 1)The supply and return temperature sensors shall be installed to provide feedback to the boilers. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-22 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2)The hot water supply temperature set point shall be reset in response to the outdoor air sensor as follows: Outdoor Air TemperatureHeating Hot Water Supply Temperature Above 70° F120°F 50° to 70°F140°F 30° to 50°160°F Below 30°F180°F 3)The temperature controls contractor shall install any required inter connecting wiring, including interface with the outdoor air sensor, water temperature sensors and reset program. c.Indications/adjustments: Provide the following indications (I) and adjustments (A) for the heating plant. (*) indicates critical alarm points. 1)Pumps start/stop (I,A) 2)Pumps lead/lag (I,A) 3)Pumps status (I, *) 4)Boiler enable/disable (I, A) 5)Boiler status (I,*) 6)P-1,2VFDspeed (I, A) 7)P-1,2VFDfault (*) 8)Building loops'differential pressure sensor (I, A). 9)Hot water supply temperature (I, A) 10)Hot water return temperature (I) D.Chilled water/hot water system changeover valves 1.Two new 3-way 2 position control valvesshall provide system changeover for the existing two pipe system. When the system is placed in heating mode by the BAS the valvesshall allow hot watersupplyfrom P-1 and P-2 to the two pipe systemand how water return from the two pipe system to the boilers. When the system is placed in heating mode by the BAS the valvesshall allow chilled water supplyfrom the chiller to the three chilled water pumps and chilled water return from the two pipe system to the chiller. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-23 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC Air HUnit E.andling 1. All existing pneumatic components of the air handling units and relief fans shall be replaced with DDC. 2.The air handling system is a constant air volume system that includes an existing supply fan, existingchilled water cooling coil, existingface and bypass heating hot water coil, new reheat coil, existing economizer damper, existing return air damper, new leaving air temperature controller, new return air temperature sensor, new mixed air temperature sensor, and new freezestat. A separate relief fan on a variable frequency drive will provide relief air from the cafeteria space. 3.When the system is commanded on by the control panel,the supply and relief fan shall start and run continuously. The relieffan shall start in low speed to minimize overloading of the motor. The outdoor air dampers shall be positioned to deliver minimum airflow. An end switch shall indicate the damper has opened. An alarm shall be issued if the end switch fails to make and the return damper, relief damper, and the outside air dampers shall be positioned to their normal position. 4.The air handling system shall be capable of operating in three modes that include a mechanical cooling mode, an economizer cooling mode, and a heating mode. The relief fan speed shall adjust to maintain the space pressure setpoint. a)Mechanical cooling mode: the system shall be placed in this mode whenever the outside air enthalpy is higher than return air enthalpy. In this mode, the outdoor air dampers shall be positioned to deliver minimum air flow. 1)If the space RH is 55% or less and the system is not at peak cooling the cooling coil control valve shall be modulated as required to maintain a supply air discharge temperature of 60ºF. The reheat coil control valve shall modulate as necessary to maintain space temperature. 2)If the space RH is above 55%and the space iscalling for full coolingthe cooling coilcontrol valve shall be modulated to maintain a supply air discharge temperature of55°F. The reheat coil control valve shall modulate as necessary to maintain space temperature. b)Economizer mode: the system shall be placed in this mode whenever the outside air enthalpy is lower than the return air enthalpy. In this mode, the system shall be controlled by an economizer program. If the room supply air temperature rises above the set-point of 55ºf and the heating valve is closed, the outdoor air economizer damper shall be slowly modulated open and the return air damper modulated closed to maintain a supply air discharge temperature of 55ºf. c)Heating mode: in this mode the outdoor air dampers shall be positioned to deliver minimum airflow (35% of supply air cfm). City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-24 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC d)When the mixedair temperature is above 40°F (adj), the face and bypass dampers shall be set to full face position and the control valve shall modulate to maintain a discharge air temperature setpoint of 55°F. e)When the mixedair temperature is below 40°F (adj), the control valve shall be fully open and the face and bypass dampers shall modulateto maintain a discharge air temperaturesetpointof 55º F. f)The reheat coil control valve shall be modulated to maintain space temperature setpoint. g)Unoccupied mode: The air handling system shall run with the outdoor air dampers closed, relief air dampers shall be closed, the return air damper shall be open, the relief fan shall be deactivated and the space shallbe at night setback temperature and maintain space humidity setpoints. 5.Interface with freezestat a capillary tube, manually re-settable, hard-wired freeze protection temperature switch in the air handling unit. When temperatures 40°f or less (adjustable) come in contact with any portion of the capillary tube, the following shall occur: a)The heating hot water control valve (n.o.) shall fully open. b)The return air damper shall open, and the relief and outdoor air dampers shall close. c)The supply air and relief air fan shall index off (regardless of whether the starter is in the hand or auto position). d)An alarm shall be issued through the ddc system. e)The system shall be locked into the freeze protection mode until manually reset by a push button on the cover of the freeze protection temperature switch. 6.When the unit is commanded off the supply fan shall stop, the outdoor air dampers shall fully close, the return damper shall fully open, and the relief fan shall be deactivated. 7.A smoke detector (by electrical) shall be installed in both the supply and return ducts. If smoke is detected by the detector, the system shall be shut down and an alarm shall be activated. 8.If smoke is detected by smoke detectors (by electrical) installed in the space, the system shall be shut down and an alarm shall be activated. 9.Provide the following indications (i) and adjustment (a) for each air handling unit. (*) indicates critical alarm point. a)Outside air temperature (i). b)Mixed air temperature (i). c)Return air temperature (i). City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-25 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC d)Reheat Coil Discharge air temperature (i, *). e)Cooling Coil Discharge air temperature (i, *). f)Supply and relief fan start/stop (i, a, *). g)Supply and relief fan on/off status (i, a, *). h)Low limit protection alarm status (i, *). i)Occupied/unoccupied mode status (i, a). j)Cooling/heating mode status (i). k)Relief fan variable speed drive hz (i). l)Space humidity (i,a). m)Filter status (i, a). n)Outside air, return air and relief air damper position (i, *). PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install wiring in a neat and workmanlike manner. Wiring to finished spaces shall be run concealed. B.All work is to be installed by a qualified person skilled in the installation of electronic control systems. The control company representative is responsible for the proper installation of the control system and will provide supervision of the installation. C.Install damper actuators for all automatic dampers. D.Install terminal equipment controllers on terminal boxes and provide all necessary control wiring. E.Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing -in drawings, and details and drawings. Install electrical work and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections of these specifications. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights. F.Wiring. The term "wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric control devices. G.Wiring System. Install complete wiring systemfor electric-electronic temperature controls. Conceal wiring, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping areexposed. Provide multi-conductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single conductors where number of conductors can be run along common path. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-26 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC H.Number-code or color-code conductors, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. 3.2ON-SITE TESTING A.Provide Engineer and/or Owner approved operation and acceptance testing of the complete system. The Engineer and/or Owner will witness all tests. B.Field Test. When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission media operation before the system is placed in line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by the installer. Provide a cross-check of each control point within the system by making a comparison between the control command and the field-controlled device. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power. Submit the results of functional and diagnostic tests and calibrations to the Engineer for final system acceptance. C.Compliance Inspection Checklist. Submit in the form requested, the following items of information to the Owner's representative and Architect/Engineer for verification of compliance to the project specifications. Failure to comply with the specified information shall constitute non-performance of the contract. The contractor shall submit written justification for each item in thechecklist that he is unable to comply with. The Owner's Representative and the Architect/Engineer will initial and date the checklist to signify Contractor's compliance before acceptance of system. 1.Verify to the Owner's Representative and Architect/Engineer in letter form that supplier has in-place support facility. Letter shall show location of support facility, name and titles of technical staff, engineers, supervisors, fitters, electricians, managers and all other personnel responsible for the completion of the work on this project. UserDateA/EDate 2.Manually generate an alarm at the remote DDC Controller as selected by the Architect/Engineer to demonstrate the capability of the workstation and alarm printer to receive alarms within 5 seconds. UserDateA/EDate 3.Disconnect one DDC Controller from the network to demonstrate that a single device failure shall not disrupt or halt peer-to-peer communication. Panel to be disconnected shall be selected by the Architect/Engineer. UserDateA/EDate 4.At a DDC Controller of the Architect/Engineer's choice, display on the portable operator's terminal: a.At least one temperature setpoint and at least one status condition; i.e.: on or off for a system or piece of equipment attached to the panel as well as for points at another DDC Controller on the network. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-27 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC b.The diagnostic results as specified for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for a system or piece of equipment attached to another DDC Controller. c.The ability to add a new point to the DDC Controller with the POT and have it automatically uploaded to the workstation to modify that panel's stored database. UserDateA/EDate 5.At the Architect/Engineer's choice, disconnect the trunk connection to demonstrate its lack of reliance on a DDC Controller to maintain full control functionality. UserDateA/EDate 3.3SERVICE AND GUARANTEE A.General Requirements. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the entire BAS System for a period of two years after completion of successful performance test. Provide necessary material required for the work. Minimize impacts on facility operations when performing scheduled adjustments and non-scheduled work. B.Description of Work. The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer equipment, software updates, transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices. Provide the manufacturer’s required adjustment and all other work necessary. C.Personnel. Provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work promptly and satisfactorily.Owner shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service representative, and of any changes in personnel. D.Schedule of Work. Provide two minor inspections at 6 month intervals and two major inspections offset equally between the minor inspections to effect quarterly inspection of alternating magnitude, and all work required as specified. Schedule major inspections in July andJanuary. Minor inspections shall include visual checks and operational test of all equipmentdelivered. Major inspections shall include all work described for minor inspections and the following work: 1.Clean all equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces. 2.Perform signal, voltage and system isolation checks of system workstations and peripherals. 3.Check and calibrate each field device. Check all analog points and digital points. 4.Run all diagnostics and correct all previously diagnosed problems. 5.Resolve and correct any previous outstanding problems. E.Emergency Service. Owner shall initiate service calls when the system is not functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete system. Furnish Owner with a telephone number where service representative can be reached at all times. Service personnel shall be at the site within 4 hours after receiving a request for service. Restore the control system to proper operating condition within 24 hours. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-28 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC F.Operation. Performance of scheduled adjustment and repair shall verify operation of the system as demonstrated by the initial performance test. G.Systems Modifications. Provide any recommendations for system modification in writing to Owner. Do not make any system modifications, including operating parameters and control settings, without prior approval of Owner. Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected. H.Software. Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system operators, and shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and software documentation. 3.4EXAMINATION A.The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started. 3.5GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A.Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible. B.Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. C.Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service. D.Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. E.All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices. F.Coordinate with the testing and balancing contractor to adjust low leakage dampers if damper leak rate exceeds specifications. 3.6INSTALLATION OF SENSORS A.Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B.Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates. C.Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported bythe wall framing. D.All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-29 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC E.Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of airflow. F.Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. G.All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells. H.Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms. I.Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location. 3.7FLOW SWITCH AND PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH INSTALLATION A.Install using a thread-o-let in steel pipe. In copper pipe use C x C x F Tee, no pipe extensions or substitutions allowed. B.Mount a minimum of 5 pipe diameters up stream and 5 pipe diameters downstream or 2 feet which ever is greater, from fittings and other obstructions. C.Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. D.Assure correct flow direction and alignment. E.Mount in horizontal piping -flow switch on top of the pipe. F.Pressure differential switches mounted on horizontal sections of pipe shall be installed on the side or top of pipes to avoid accumulation of debris. 3.8ACTUATORS A.Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions. B.Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions. C.Valves -Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations. 3.9WARNING LABELS A.Affix plastic labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the Control System including all air handling unit fans at doors. Label shall indicate the following: C A U T I O N This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start at any time without warning. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-30 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 3.10IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING A.All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information. B.Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. C.Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates. D.Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label. 3.11CONTROLLERS A.Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement. B.Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of 15% spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, 15% of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 15% of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used. C.Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, pointdatabase definition, and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points. 3.12PROGRAMMING A.Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use. B.Point Naming. System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index. C.Software Programming 1.Provide programming for the system as per specifications and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-31 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC D.Operators' Interface 1.The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface data base, and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface. 2.As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of the operator interface. Testduration shall be a minimum of 16 hours on-site. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative. E.Demonstration. A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 4 hours on-site with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits acceptanceof the delivered system for on-line operation. 3.13CLEANING A.This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated bytheGeneral Contractor. B.At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc. C.At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.14PROTECTION A.The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused. B.The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that isnot immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. 3.15FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-32 SECTION 23 0923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC B.Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported. C.Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work. 3.16ACCEPTANCE A.The control systems will not be acceptedas meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractormay be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty. END OF SECTION 23 0923 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Automatic Temperature Control System -DDC 23 0923-33 SECTION 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide equipment, materials, tools, labor, and supervision necessary to furnish, fabricate, and install acomplete Natural Gas piping system. 1.2STANDARDS AND CODES A.Pipe materials specified in this Section shall apply to technical sections of Division 23of the Project Manual where applicable. Special requirements as may be called for in the technical sections, or shown on the Drawings, shall take precedence over General Requirements herein. Piping located in plenums shall be plenum rated for fire and smoke. B.Gas piping and connections to equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA-54 and the City Gas Code and the local utility company. 1.3PRODUCT HANDLING A.Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. B.Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. C.Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIAL A.MaterialService 1.Black steel pipeERW, Schedule 40, Aboveground natural gas.See finish ASTM A53.and identification requirements. 2.Welded black steel Schedule 40, coated Gas vents with asphalt and wrapped, ASTM A120. B.Fittings 1.Threaded pipe -malleable iron fittings, 125-pound standard flat band water pattern. 2.Welded pipe -welded neck fittings and welded neck flanges, same material and strength as pipe. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Facility Natural Gas Piping 23 1123-1 SECTION 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 3.Carbon steel pipe -material and strength shall correspond to pipe specifications. ANSI B31.5. 4.Plastic underground natural gas piping -all fittings shall be manufactured (tee's, elbows, reducers and transitions to steel pipe), by the piping manufacturer. C.Joints 1.Threaded pipe -make joints using approved pipe joint compound, applied to male threads only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs, and ream ends to full size of bore. Threads shall not be exposed on chromium-plated pipe. 2.Welded pipe -welding shall conform to welding section of ANSI B31.1 "Code for Power Piping". Pipe up to 2" diameter shall be screwed. Pipe 2 ½" diameter and over shall be welded. D.Nipples and Unions 1.Nipples shall conform to size, weight, and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1-1/2", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. 2.For pipe 3" and smaller, use screwed unions; over 3", use flanged unions. For steel and wrought iron pipe, use malleable iron ground joint unions, black or galvanized, to conform to pipe. Cast iron flanged unions are to be gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. Install unions on equipment intended to be disassembled. 3.Dielectric unions shall be installed between connections of copper pipe and ferrous piping. 2.2PLUG VALVES A.Plug valves shall not be furnished unless specifically shown on the Drawings. When so indicated, this type of valve shall meet the following specifications: 1.Smaller than 2 in.: Tapered plug valves, semi-steel, screwed, wrench operated with wrench. 2.2 in. and larger: Tapered plug valves, carbon steel, flanged, lubricated plug wrench operated with a wrench. 2.3PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE (NATURAL GAS) A.Gas regulators shall be furnished and installed to maintain the gas pressure to the pilot supply and main burner supply line within +10% of the operating pressure from maximum to minimum firing rates at inlet operating pressures of 1-1/2 to 2 psig. B.Regulators shall be of the spring-loaded or pressure balanced type. Under no circumstances shall a dead weight or a weight and level type of regulator be used. C.Gas regulators shall be suitable for operation with electronic ignition “dead end” conditions. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Facility Natural Gas Piping 23 1123-2 SECTION 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING D.Gas pressure regulators shall be AGA and CGA certified for scheduled operating conditions. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install piping and make service connection as shown on the Drawings. B.Finish: 1.In typically unoccupied spaces (i.e. concealed spaces, above ceilings, mechanical rooms, etc.) paint and prime all exposed piping with epoxy primer and two coats epoxy “yellow” paint. C.Do not install rusted fittings. D.Pipe size 2 in. and larger or 2 psig and greater shall have welded joints; pipe less than 2 in. and less than 2 psig shall have threaded joints made up with gas resistant joint compound. E.Install gas shutoff plug valve in main, in each branch line and at each appliance. F.Install service plug valve at each outlet. G.General: Comply with requirements of basic piping material sections for installation of piping materials. Install piping products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, with applicable installation requirements of ANSI Z 223.l, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. H.Use sealants on metal gas piping threads that are chemically resistant to LP and natural gas. Use sealants sparingly and apply to only male threads of metal joints. I.Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping. J.Do not installdefective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads that are chipped, stripped or damaged. K.Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with a threaded plug or cap immediately after installation, and retain until continuing piping or equipment connections are completed. L.Install dirt-legs in gas piping at connections to equipment and elsewhere as indicated, and where required by code or regulation. M.Install tee fittings with bottom outlet plugged, or capped, at bottom of pipe risers. N.Do not install gas piping through foundations or under buildings. O.Gas piping shall be electrically grounded and continuously grounded within the project, and bonded tightly to the grounding connection. P.Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals are joined together. Q.Install piping with 1/64" per foot (1/8%) downward slope in direction flow. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Facility Natural Gas Piping 23 1123-3 SECTION 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING R.Install piping parallel to other piping, but maintain minimum of 12" clearance between gas piping and steam or hydronic piping above 200F (93C). S.Gas Service: 1.General: Arrange with utility company to provide gas service to indicated location with shutoff at terminus. Consult with utility as to extent of its work, costs, fees and permits involved. Pay such costs and fees; obtain permits. 2.Extend service pipe from utility's terminus toinside building wall, under utility's direction. 3.Provide shutoff outside building where indicated. Provide shutoff in gas service pipe at entry in building. 4.Provide concrete foundations and pads for gas meters per utilities directions. T.Installation of Valves: 1.Gas Cocks: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas-fired equipment item; and on risers and braces where indicated. 2.Locate gas cocks where easily accessible, and where they will be protected from possible injury. 3.Control Valves: Install asindicated. Refer to Division 26 for wiring, not work of this section. 4.Pressure Regulating Valves: Install where shown and where required; comply with Utility requirements. Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size of outlet. Install gas shutoff valve upstream of each pressure regulating valve. 3.2EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A.Fuel Gas Piping Tightness Test: Prior to initial operation, test and purge fuel gas piping in accordance with ANSI Z 223.I, National Fuel Gas Code. B.General: Connect gas piping to each gas-fired equipment item, with dirt leg and shutoff gas cock and pressure regulator where required. Comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions. C.Piping Tests: 1.Using dry nitrogen, purge each segment to be tested. Cap or otherwise seal the segmentto be tested. Fill system with dry nitrogen and test in accordance with NFPA 54. 2.Repair or replace fuel gas piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. 3.All welded pipe shall be pressure tested to 90 psig for a minimum period of one hour. Submit test results. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Facility Natural Gas Piping 23 1123-4 SECTION 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING D.Purge System: 1.After all segments have been tested and entire system completed, purge the system free of air in accordance with NFPA 54. Do not leave purge discharge points unattended. E.Spare Parts: 1.Furnishto Owner, with receipt, 2 valve wrenches for each type of gas valve installed, requiring same. END OF SECTION 23 1123 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Facility Natural Gas Piping 23 1123-5 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide equipment, materials, tools, labor, and supervision necessary to furnish, fabricate, and install complete piping system. 1.2STANDARDS AND CODES A.Pipe materials specified in this Section shall apply to technical sections of Division 23of the Project Manual where applicable. Special requirements as may be called for in the technical sections, or shown on the Drawings, shall take precedence over General Requirements herein. Piping located in plenums shall be plenum rated for fire and smoke. 1.3PRODUCT HANDLING A.Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. B.Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. C.Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit piping schedule listing each pipe material used and systems served. B.Submit shop drawings at ¼" per foot scale indicating exact routing and elevations for all piping systems. C.Submit shop drawings and product data to include product description, manufacturer, model, dimensions, size, and performance data. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1MATERIAL A.MaterialService 1.Copper water tube, hard temper, ASTM B88. a.Type LHot and chilled"ø. 2.Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A53.Hot and chilled water City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-1 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING B.Fittings 1.Copper water tube, cast bronze or wrought copper, solder joint type. ANSI B16.18 and B16.22. 2.Copper drainage tube (M) -Cast bronze fittings, solder joint fittings. ANSI B.16, 23-69. 3.Threaded pipe -malleable iron fittings, 125-pound standard flat band water pattern. 4.Welded pipe -welded neck fittings and welded neck flanges, same material and strength as pipe. 5.Grooved fittings –may be used for geothermal water, as approved by Code. Grooved fittings shall be Victaulic, Grinnell, or engineer-approved equivalent. 6.Carbon steel pipe -material and strength shall correspond to pipespecifications. ANSI B31.5. C.Joints 1.Threaded pipe -make joints using approved pipe joint compound, applied to male threads only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs, and ream ends to full size of bore. Threads shall not be exposed on chromium-plated pipe. 2.Copper water and drainage tube -use 95-5 tin antimony or silver solder, cut pipe square, clean and polish tube ends and inner surface of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. 3.Weldedpipe -welding shall conform to welding section of ANSI B31.1 "Code for Power Piping". Pipe up to 2" diameter shall be screwed. Pipe 2 ½" diameter and over shall be welded. D.Nipples and Unions 1.Nipples shall conform to size, weight, and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1-1/2", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. 2.For pipe 3" and smaller, use screwed unions; over 3", use flanged unions. For steel and wrought iron pipe, use malleable iron ground joint unions, black or galvanized, to conform to pipe. Cast iron flanged unions are to be gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. Install unions on equipment intended to be disassembled. 3.Dielectric unions shall not be installed between connections of copper and ferrous piping; provide line-size Victaulic Style 47 Dielectric Waterwayor bronze or brass transitionsat each such connection. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-2 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 2.2SLEEVES A.Sleeves passing through non-loadbearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: For pipes 2-1/2" in size and smaller -24-gauge; 3 in. to 6 in. -22-gauge; over 6 in. -20-gauge. B.Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings, and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C.Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. E.Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or roofing shall be flashed and sealed. 2.3GUARDS A.Where exposed insulated piping extends through floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 60 inches. Guard to be galvanized sheet steel not less than 26-gauge. 2.4FIRE SAFING A.Metal piping and sleeves passing through floors, roof, partitions and fire walls, shall be provided with firestop by packing space between pipe and sleeve with UL listed non-sag and self-leveling fire safing insulation per manufacturer's instructions. B.Plastic piping passing through fire rated floors and fire rated walls shall be provided with firestop by providing intumescent wrap strip around the pipe, enclosed in steel collar attached to structure. C.Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use non-sag or self-leveling putty or caulking, one-piece intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL listed. D.Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350oF (121 to 177oC), UL listed. E.Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective barrier against smoke, fire, toxic and combustible gases. F.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide non-sag and self-leveling fire barrier caulk, wrap/strip, moldable putty and sheet forms of one of the following: 1.3M Brand. 2.Flame Stop. 3.Dow Corning. 4.Metacaulk. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-3 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 2.5EXPANSION TANKS –NON-POTABLE SYSTEMS A.Provide expansion tanks of size and number as indicated. Construct tank of welded steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for a working pressure of 125 psi. Furnish National Board Form U-1 denoting compliance. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles or hangers. Provide heavy duty butyl rubber diaphragmto permanently separate air charge from system water and to maintain design expansion capacity. Provide pressure gauge, lifting rings, floor mounting skirt, and drain fitting. B.Tank diaphragmshall allow for full acceptance volume. C.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion tanks of the following: 1.Amtrol, Inc. 2.Armstrong 3.Bell & Gossett ITT 4.Taco, Inc. 5.Wessels 6.Watts 2.6AIR AND AIR/DIRT SEPARATORS A.Air separators shall be by Spirotherm or Taco 4900. 2.7AIR VENTS A.Manual air vents, equivalent to B & G No. 17 SR. B.Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125 psi, minimum 3/4" NPS inlet and outlet connections. Equivalent to Bell & Gossett #7 or #87 (#107A for high capacity where noted on Drawings), with copper overflow connection. C.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vent valves by Watson -McDaniel Co.Bell & Gossett-ITT Fluid Handling Division, Bell & Gossett, ITT Fluid Handling Div.Hoffman Specialty-ITT Fluid Handling Divisions , Hoffman Specialty, ITT Fluid Handling Div. Spirax/Sarco, Spirax SarcoWatson-McDaniel Co., or an engineer-approved equivalent. 2.8FLOW BALANCING A.Calibrated Balance Valves (ball type) with Flow Meter Fittings: City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-4 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 1.Provide as indicated, calibrated balance valves equipped with readout ports to facilitate connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Valves shall provide precise flow measurement, precision flow balancing and positive shut-offwith no drip seat. Valves shall have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then re-opened to set point without disturbing balance position. Provide calibrated nameplate or division ring scale to indicate degree of precision machined orifice. Valves to be leak tight at full-rated working pressure. All valves to be provided with molded insulation to permit access for balancing and readout. 2.Circuit setters need not be line size, but shall be sized for specific application. 3.Provide balancing devices designed for low flow applications for flows 1 gpm and lower. B.Automatic Flow Control Valves 1.Where indicated on drawings, provide automatic flow control valves with internal adjustment capability. 2.All internally adjustable cartridges shall include only non-abrasive and non-corrosive thermoplastic materials, whose shape and properties will not change over the life of the valve. 3.The cartridge shall be removable, without removing the valve or disturbing the line plumbing in any way, by unscrewing a plug in the valve body. The cartridge shall remain attached to the inside of the removed plug, to ensure it does not get misplaced and the plug is not re- installed without the cartridge. 4.Each cartridge shall be field adjustable, to any of 8 flowrates with an Allen wrench. 5.Valves shall be warranted, by the manufacturer, to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5 years. 6.Valves shall control flow to within 5 % of design. 7.The valve flow curve shall be smooth over its entirenominal control range. Gaps, bumps and dips in flow curves shall not be acceptable. C.Manufacturer: 1.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide calibrated balance valves of one of the following or an engineer-approved equivalent: a.Armstrong b.Bell & Gossett c.Griswold d.Taco, Inc. e.Victaulic TA City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-5 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 2.9TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTORTAPS A.Provide temperature gauge connector taps pressure rated for 500 psi and 200° F (90° C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/2" NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly for dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping. B.Provide one test kit. C.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gauge connector taps manufactured by one of the following, or an engineer-approved equivalent: 1.Peterson Engineering Co. 2.Sisco 3.Trerice 2.10FLEXIBLE PUMP CONNECTORS A.Install flexible connectors at all suction and discharge pump connections to relieve pump and piping stresses. Flexible hose section shallbe a304 stainless steel, close pitch, annular corrugated hose with a type 304 braided outer covering. End connections to be ANSI class 150 carbon steel plate flanges. 2.11LOW PRESSURE Y-TYPE PIPELINE STRAINERS A.General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screens. B.Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted valve for blowdown. C.Copper Piping 2" and Smaller: Use cast bronze strainer equal to Mueller #351 with blowdown valve and cap. D.Threaded End 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with valve for blowdown. Fitted with 3/64 perforated screen. E.Flanged Ends 1-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with valve for blowdown. Fitted with 3/64 perforated screen. F.Provide blowdown valve and cap or plug for each strainer. G.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Y-type strainers manufactured by one of the following, or an engineer-approved equivalent: 1.Armstrong 2.Hoffman Specialty City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-6 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 3.Metraflex 4.Mueller 5.Spirax Sarco 6.Trane 7.Watts Regulator PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Install pipe for mechanical systems as shown on the Drawings, as called for in other Sections, and as specified herein. B.Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated, straight, plumb, and as direct as possible, form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls, partitions, and ceilings, offsetting only where necessary to follow walls and avoid interference with other mechanical items. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. C.Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. Branch piping shall come off the tops of mains unless shown otherwise. D.Locate valves within reachable distance from equipment being served for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. E.Check piping for interference with other trades; avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. F.Where rough-ins are required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in dimensions with Owner or equipment supplier before roughing-in. G.Provide drains in low point of each piping run; drain shall include full-port ball valve with threaded cap. H.Install automatic temperature control valves, separablewells, pressure taps, and other items as called for and furnished by the temperature controls section.Install expansion tank as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, chargetank with proper air charge as recommended by manufacturer. Route drain to floor drain. Set floor mounted tanks on concrete housekeeping pads. I.Install air separators in pump suction lines. Connect inlet and outlet piping. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4" per foot (2%) upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve. Separator shall not be supported by piping, install pipe hanger at inlet and outlet. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-7 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING J.Install combination pressure reducing and water relief valve as indicated and make coldwater connection. Install isolation valves around pressure reducing and water relief valve. Install fast fill bypass line with globe valve. K.Install manual air vents for each element of radiation coils at all high points in mains, branches, run outs and at other points likely to entrap air. L.Install automatic air vents in boiler and equipment rooms, at points where supply and return lines rise or drop. Extend 1/4" copper overflow line to floor drain and elbow into drain. M.Install calibrated balance valves with flow meter fittings at each terminal unit and elsewhere as indicated. N.Installbalancing butterfly valveson each pump discharge line and elsewhere as indicated. Install in horizontal or vertical position with stem in upward position; allow clearance above stem for check mechanism removal. After hydronic system has been completed, mark calibrated nameplate with stripe of yellow lacquer to permanently mark final balanced position. O.Install Y-type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in strainer blow-down connection. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow-down connection. P.Locate Y-type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment: 1.Temperature control valves. 2.Pressure reducing valves. 3.Temperature or pressure regulating valves. 4.Pumps. Q.Install control valves, flow switches, temperature sensor walls, gauge taps, flow meters, etc., provided by Temperature Controls Installer. R.Installflexible pump connectors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 3.2PIPING TESTS A.Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31. B.General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test piping system before insulation is installed whenever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water or air and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. 1.Required test period is 2 hours. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-8 SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 2.Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25-psi test pressure. 3.Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. C.Repair piping systems sections that fail the required piping test, by disassembly and reinstallation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. D.Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. E.Heating and cooling water system pipes are to be thoroughly flushed and cleaned prior to being put into service. The flushing water must not go through any air handler, chiller, boiler, cooling or heating coils, terminal heating coils, or unit heaters. Strainer screens are to be removed prior to the flushing operation and are to be replaced when the flushing operation has been completed. As soon as possible after the flushing has been completed, the lines are to be filled with treated water to avoid the creation of a corrosive environment inside the pipes. Flushing operations are to be reviewed with and approved by the Owner's representative prior to any flushingoperation. Pipe scale, welding slag, and any other debris shall be removed from pipes. The Owner's representative shall determine when the flushing operation is complete. 3.3SLEEVES A.Install sleeves for piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams, and foundations. B.Install fire-proofing per manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4ESCUTCHEONS A.Install escutcheons for pipes entering finished spaces. 3.5PIPE PENETRATIONS A.Penetrations shall be free of debris and dirt. Dam the penetration (when required) with an acceptable material. Apply firestop material to the penetration per manufacturer's installation instructions. Use a caulking gun, putty knife or other normal trade tools. Remove damming materials where necessary after cure. Clean up with Xylene. 3.6FIRE SAFING A.Install fire safing at all penetrations through walls, floors, etc. per manufacturer's installation instructions as required to meet UL listing. B.Install escutcheons for pipes entering finished spaces. END OF SECTION 23 2113 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Piping 23 2113-9 SECTION 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install pumps as required by the Drawings and this Section. 1.2QUALIFICATIONS A.Centrifugal pumps shall be by Aurora, Bell & Gosset, TACO, Armstrong or PACO. Model numbers and electrical characteristics as scheduled on Drawings. B.Air operated pumps shall be Wilden, Warren-Rupp or Marlow. Model numbers as scheduled on Drawings. C.Positive displacement pumps shall be by Viking. Model numbers and electrical characteristics as scheduled on Drawings. 1.3PERFORMANCE AND TEST A.Pump capacities and ratings shall be as scheduled on Drawings. B.Pump performance and motor characteristics shall be such that motor will not be loaded beyond its service factor if operating head is reduced to80% of specified head. C.Pumps shall be factory-tested at specified conditions. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. B.Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shopdrawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. C.Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1IN-LINE CIRCULATING PUMPS A.In-line circulating pumps shall be single stage, vertical split case design, in cast-iron bronze fitted construction. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. B.The impeller shall be of the enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced and keyed to the shaft and secured with a suitable lock nut. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Pumps 23 2123-1 SECTION 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS C.The pump shall employ a mechanical seal, with a carbon seal ring and ceramic seat. A shaft sleeve shall be furnished under the complete wetted area of the mechanical seal. D.The bearing frame assembly of the pump shall befitted with oil-lubricated, bronze journal bearings and a hardened alloy steel shaft. E.A flexible coupling capable of absorbing torsional vibrations shall be employed between the pump and motor. F.The motor shall be resilient mounted, equipped with oil-lubricated journal bearings. Motors shall be ODP. 2.2FINISH A.Pumps shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with machine enamel prior to shipment. B.Finish marred during installation shall be touched up. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1PREPARATION A.Lay out exact location for concrete pump bases, and furnish to General Contractor a dimensional drawing showing base sizes and locations. B.In-line pumps shall be mounted in accordance with the pump manufacturer's recommendations. Layout piping system to accommodate motor removal requirements. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Install pumps for all fluid systems as required by the Drawings. B.Provide the following for each centrifugal and positive displacement pump: 1.Flexible connector in suction and discharge line. 2.Strainer and shutoff valve in suction line. Check valve and two butterfly valves 3.valve in discharge lines. 4.Pressure gauge with snubbers and turn cocks in both pump suction and discharge. C.Suction inlet pipe for centrifugal pumps shall be a straight section of pipe of not less than five (5) pipe diameters in length between pump suction flange and any change in direction of suction line. D.In-line pumps shall be supported in accordance with the pump manufacturer's instructions. 3.3START-UP ASSISTANCE A.The manufacturer shall provide start-up assistance in the form of a factory trained service technician. END OF SECTION 23 2123 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Hydronic Pumps 23 2123-2 SECTION 23 3416 FANS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.The extent of work is shown on drawings and in schedules and by requirements of this section, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, roof exhaust fans, andfan accessories. 1.2CODES AND STANDARDS A.Installer: A firm with at least 3 years of successful fan installation experience. B.AMCA Standards: Comply with air movement and control association standards as applicable to testing and rating fans, including but not limited to, AMCA 99, 210, 211, 261, 300, 301. Provide fans that bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. C.UL Compliance: Provide fan and components which are UL listed and labeled. D.SMACNA Standards: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA duct construction standards. 1.3PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Deliver products with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components in factory fabricated protective framing. B.Handle products carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. Do not install dam- aged components; replace and return damaged components to manufacturer for repairs or replace- ment. C.Store products in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details. B.Product Data: Product data shall indicate performance data relative to the information scheduled on the drawings. In addition,provide dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and gauges and finishes of materials. C.Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. D.Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet and radiation at rated capacity. E.Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring clearly indicating factory installed and field installed wiring. F.Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions. G.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operatinginstruc- tions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fans 23 3416-1 SECTION 23 3416 FANS 1.5ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 1.6ACOUSTICS A.Fan manufacturer shall provide sound level data for cataloged operating range of unit. Data shall be obtained in conformance with ANSI S1.32-1980, American National Standard Methods for the De- termination of Sound Power Levels of Discrete Frequency and Narrow Band Noise Sources in Rever- beration Rooms and AMCA Standard 300-1967, test code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. 1.7EXTRA MATERIALS A.Supply two sets of belts for each belt driven fan. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or engineer ap- proved equivalent: 1.Breidert 2.Cook 3.Greenheck 4.Trane 5.Twin City Fan 6.Penn-Barry 2.2GENERAL A.Provide fans of type, sizes, ratings and capacities as indicated on drawings and in schedules. 2.3ROOF EXHAUSTERS A.Wall Exhausters 1.Centrifugal, direct driven, with spun aluminum housing, motor, 1/2 inch mesh bird screen, cadmium plated bolts and screws. 2.Disconnect Switch: Factory wired non-fusible in housing for thermal overload protected mo- tor solid state speed controller. 3.Motorized Damper: Line voltage, motorized opposed blade damper interlocked with fan. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fans 23 3416-2 SECTION 23 3416 FANS PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSPECTION A.Installer shall examine areas and conditions under which fans are to be installed, and notify Contrac- tor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2INSTALLATION OF FANS A.Install fans where shown in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions, recog- nized industry practices, and in accordance with National Electrical Code, to insure compliance with requirements and serve intended purposes. B.Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, and electrical work, as necessary to interface instal- lation of fans with other work. C.Temporary Closure: Upon completion of installation, provide protective covering on fan ductwork connection openings to prevent entrance of dust and debris into equipment. D.Install vibration isolators and flexible electrical leads to properly isolate the fan vibration from the structure. E.Duct Connections: Provide ductwork, accessories, and flexible connections as indicated. F.Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. G.Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated. H.Do not operate fans in normal operation until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lu- bricated, and fan has been test run under observation. I.Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s wiring diagram submittals to Electrical Installer. 1.Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s submittal and installation requirements of electrical drawings. Ensure that rotation is in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed withfan start-up until wiring installa- tion is acceptable to fan installer. 3.3ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A.Insure that the fan is wired properly for proper fan rotation and proper interface with associated out- door air damper. B.Providepositive electrical motor grounding. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fans 23 3416-3 SECTION 23 3416 FANS 3.4TESTING A.After installation of fans has been completed, test each fan to demonstrate proper operation of unit at performance requirements specified, including, but not limited to, proper rotation of impeller. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected at no additional cost to owner. 3.5MANUFACTURER’S START-UP SERVICES A.Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trainedservice engineer without additional charge to start the unit(s). 3.6WARRANTY A.Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever oc- curs first. END OF SECTION 233416 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fans 23 3416-4 SECTION 23 5239 HEATING BOILERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Provide and install all materials associated with the combustion air ducts and flue exhaust vent ducts. 1.2CODES AND STANDARDS A.Boiler and burner systems shall comply with the following. 1.UL 2.AGA certified 3.FM 4.CSD-1 5.ASME 6.NFPA 54 7.State Boiler Code 1.3QUALIFICATIONS A.Boilers shall be Thermal SolutionsModel EVS. 1.4WARRANTY A.The boiler and boiler accessories shall be warranted to be free of defects and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of shipment. The heat exchangershall also carry a 3-year limited warranty and a 10-year warranty against thermal shock. The burner shall carry a 10-year limited warranty. B.Signed Warranty Certificate shall be issued with each boiler. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1BOILER AND BOILER ACCESSORIES A.The Contractor shall furnish and install the boiler as shown on the plans in accordance with all codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.The water containing section shall be made of copper-finned tube construction employing straight, solid copper tubes 7/8" ID having radial integral fins. Tubes shall be set vertically and rolled securely into a gasketless header top and bottom. The header shall allow for individual access and replacement of each tube. The heat exchanger shall be a circular 2-pass design encompassing the entire burner and enclosed in AL29-4C/ Stainless Steel with a fully water-backed tube sheet. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Heating Boilers and Accessories 23 5239-1 SECTION 23 5239 HEATING BOILERS AND ACCESSORIES 2.The boiler shall be constructed in accordance with Section IV of the ASME Code for low pressure heating boilers. The boiler shall bear the ASME "H" stamp and be National Board listed for 160 PSI working pressure. The boiler shall be UL listed, approved and designed for 88% thermal efficiency as a non-condensing boiler. 3.The heat exchanger assembly shall be contained within a 16-gauge negative pressure steel jacket protected with a powder-coated finish. The unit must be capable of operating with all the jacket panels removed during safety inspection or maintenance periods. 4.The boiler will be equipped with a non-sparking blower manufactured with acast aluminum housing and wheel. Blower shall be equipped with a replaceable combustion air filter 99% efficient to one micron. The boiler will have the capability of sealed, direct or conventional venting. Air inlet dampers and vacuum relief dampers are not required for proper operation. The boiler shall be fully UL approved for installation indoors. 5.Fuel Burning System a.Radiant non-corroding ceramic burner, with no moving parts. Double-meshed screen, fiber-metal mats, aluminized or stainless steel construction of the burner will not be accepted. b.Burner operation shall be Full Modulation with minimum 3:1 turn down utilizing a VFD and air-fuel ratio valve for dependable, repeatable modulation. c.Interrupted-type mixed fuel-air pilot system with electric spark-to-pilot ignition that utilizes a UV scanner to prove pilot before main gas valves open. Hot surface ignition systems are not acceptable. d.The entire firing control sequence shall be monitored by a UL approved, commercial- type microprocessor flame safeguard programmer with first out fault annunciation and diagnostic indicator lights. Furnish pre-purge and post-purge timing. Shut down burner in the event of ignition pilot and/or main flame failure with manual reset. e.Full frontal access port shall be provided for the control area. f.Combustion air pressure switch shall be provided. g.The sound level for a single boiler shall be no more than 60 db. 6.Gas Train a.Gas train shall be UL/FM/CSD-1 compliant. b.The gas train shall be certified to take a maximum of 5 psi Natural Gas. Additional step-down regulators are not allowed. c.Pilot and main gas pressure regulator. d.Automatic main and redundant gas valves. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Heating Boilers and Accessories 23 5239-2 SECTION 23 5239 HEATING BOILERS AND ACCESSORIES e.Leak test valves downstream of each gas valve. f.High and low gas pressure switches. g.Manual shut-off valve upstream of burner and downstream of last gas valve. 7.Electrical Input a.Electrical input to each boiler shall be 120v/1ph. The manufacturer will mount the control transformer and fuses inside the unit, as needed, before it leaves the factory. Single-point electrical hook-up on every unit is required; separate power wiring and control wiring is not acceptable. 8.Water Trim and Controls a.ASME rated pressure relief valve set at 50 psig. b.Combination water pressure and temperature gauge. Furnish graduated pressure gauge scale from 1-1/2 to 3 times of pressure relief valve setting. c.A water flow switch to prevent burner operation during low water flow conditions. d.An adjustable high limit temperature controller with manual reset to prevent water temperature from exceeding a safe system temperature. 9.Controls a.Boiler shall utilize a control system featuring a 2-line, 16-character back-lit display to monitor boiler inlet and outlet temperature, system temperature, outside air temperature, firing rate set point, modulating percent, and mixing valve demand. Additionally, it displays boiler sequence messages, hold and lockout messages, last 10 alarm messages, and boiler inlet temperature history. b.The boiler shall include inlet and outlet temperature sensors to monitor boiler temperatures and control boiler modulation to precisely match boiler output to system demand. The control provides pump control, outdoor reset, warm weather shut down, and domestic hot water priority. c.The boiler control shall be able to control a single boiler installation or can control the lead/lag sequence and modulation of up to 8 boilers by simply interconnecting the boilers with a standard phone cord. d.The boiler shall be able to facilitate integration with a BACnet building management system. 2.2BOILER EXHAUST AND COMBUSTION AIR A.For combustion air make-up use schedule 40 PVC. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Heating Boilers and Accessories 23 5239-3 SECTION 23 5239 HEATING BOILERS AND ACCESSORIES B.For boiler exhaust use Van –Packer Model CS,VP1738 stainless steel inner liner and 24 gauge aluminized steel shell for condensing boilers. Exhaust stack shall be UL 1738 listed, pre-fabricated, sectional type. Flue inside diameter is as noted on drawings. Joints shall be sealed with high temperature cement and aluminized steel draw bands. Cement and draw bands shall be supplied by the stack manufacturer. C.Slope exhaust piping from termination point back to boiler unit at a minimum of 1/4"/ft. D.Provide roof termination kit with top section protective cap, insulated roof penetration fitting, and support assembly. Base section shall include a bottom drain. E.The weight of the flue shall be carried by 2" x 1/4" steel straps suspended from the construction above. F.Provide separate combustion and exhaust vent for each boiler. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Layout exact location for extended concrete housekeeping pads. Pads shall be a minimum of 4" in height. Frame concrete base around existing floor drain. Boilers shall rest entirely on new housekeeping pads as indicated on drawings. B.Coordinate and field verify boiler installation clearance requirements. C.Coordinate all electrical andcontrol wiring. Coordinate the requirements for electrical kill switches at each entrance to the boiler room. Kill switch to shutdown all power to each boiler. D.Install according to manufacturer's recommendation. E.Unit shall be provided with a condensate trap drain fitting for the exhaust chamber. From condensate trap, route PVC condensate drain line to floor drains. F.Install drain valve and extend 3/4" drain line to nearest floor drain. Drain line branches can drain to a common header to floor drain. G.Install relief valve at 18" above floor and extend 3/4" relief piping to floor drain. Drain line branches can drain to a common header to floor drain. H.Install vent drain off base of flue with trap. Do not header with other drains or with vent drain from another boiler. Run vent drains separately to floor drain. I.Provide hose connection at heater outlet for initial heater calibration during start-up. J.Route natural gas relief pipe to exterior. Use aluminum tubing sized per manufacturer's recommendations. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Heating Boilers and Accessories 23 5239-4 SECTION 23 5239 HEATING BOILERS AND ACCESSORIES 3.2START-UP SERVICE A.Manufacturer shall furnish a factory-trained service engineer without additional charge. Representative shall supervise start-up and instruct Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance. Manufacturer's representative shall provide start up service for two consecutive years including parts and labor necessary for the replacement of spark plugs. B.Manufacturer shall provide operating instructions and parts list. C.Provide 4 hours for start up and instruction to Owner. END OF SECTION 23 5239 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Heating Boilers and Accessories 23 5239-5 Division 26 Electrical 26 Division SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Basic materials and methods. 1.2REFERENCES A.Work shall comply with applicable standards of the: 1.American Insurance Association 2.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3.Edison Electric Institute 4.Factory Mutual (FM) 5.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 6.Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association 7.National Board of Fire Underwriters 8.National Bureau of Standards 9.National Electrical Code (NEC) 10.National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 11.National Electrical Safety Code 12.National Fire Protection Association 13.National Safety Council 14.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 15.Uniform Fire Code (UFC) 16.William-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Basic materials and methods are described. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-1 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit to the Architect/Engineer for review, prior to the placing of orders for any equipment, a complete schedule of electrical fixtures, materials and panels to be installed. Schedule shall consist of catalog cuts, diagrams, shop drawings, performance curves, or any other descriptive material necessary to fully describe the equipment proposed andits operating characteristics. B.Review of the materials, including alternate or substitute items, shall be obtained in writing from the Architect/Engineer; verbal review will not be considered binding. C.Submittals shall have been reviewed and signed by the contractor, prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Faxes or copies of faxes are not acceptable. The Architect/Engineer will review submittalsto aid in interpreting the drawings and specifications, and in so doing will assume that the submittals conform to the specified requirements set forth in this specification. Review of submittals by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with the elements of the specifications. D.Furnish copies of parts lists and operating and maintenance instructions and manuals, and furnish the services of a competent, trained individual thoroughly familiar with the operation of each special system. Special systems shall include electrical and communications equipment requiring operating instructions, inspection or periodic maintenance. The person instructing the Owner shall see that the Owner is conversant with the operation of the system and its various controls; the company from whom maintenance service and repairs may be obtained; and the location and function of switches, devices and accessories, contained in the system. E.Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be supplied containing the following: 1.Operation, maintenance, recommended spare parts, and renewal parts information for equipment furnished. 2.Set of complete, final, as-reviewed and accepted information required to be submitted for review. 3.As-constructed electrical, equipment, and installation drawings. 4.Index of equipment suppliers listing current names, addresses and telephone numbers of those who should be contacted for service. 5.As-constructed contract drawings permanently marked in red to show departures from original drawings. 6.Submit one (1) copy for review. This copy will be returned. Submit three (3)final revised copies. F.Submit fire stop information and data sheets. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-2 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.5PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A.Obtain, furnish and include the costs of necessary permits, fees and inspection certificates for material and labor furnished. Include costs of permits, certificates and inspection fees required in connection with the installation, unless otherwise noted in the detailed contractual description preceding these Electrical Specifications. B.Obtain, furnish and include the costs of necessary permits, fees and inspections required by the local Fire Marshall and the UFC, for installation of the emergency generator. C.Where applications are required for the procuring of utility services, see that such application is properly filed with the utility. D.On completion of work, furnish satisfactory evidence that work is acceptable to regulatory authorities having jurisdiction. E.Be responsible to see that the proper inspection authoritiesare notified when inspections are required by Code, and provide necessary assistance to the inspector during inspection. 1.6REGULATIONS A.Installation shall conform to or exceed the minimum requirements of the NEC, and federal, state, local and municipal ordinances. B.Work shall be performed in accordance with applicable recommendations of the ADA and OSHA. C.Installations shown on drawings or required in the specifications that exceed the minimum requirements of the NEC or other regulations shall be installed as shown or specified. 1.7CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.Intent of the drawings and specifications is to describe the complete installation. At the conclusion of construction, the electrical system shall be turned over to the Owner complete and ready for safe, efficient operation. B.Drawings and the specifications are intended to be cooperative and supplementary. Closely check the drawings and specifications for any obvious errors or omissions, and bring any such condition to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to the receipt of bids, in order to permit clarification by means of a mailed Addendum. C.Drawings for electrical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work, general arrangement, approximate sizes, and locations of equipment and materials. Exact locations shall be determined to best fit the layout of the job. Scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient or accurate for determining these locations. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement,make such changes as directed by the Architect/Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner. D.A complete set of contract documents shall be on the site at all times. Prior to installing the work, check drawings for dimensions and conflicts. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-3 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E.Rules 1.Where the context requires, the singular includes the plural and the plural includes the singular. 2.The use of "and" in a combined provision means that all elements in the provision must be complied with, or must exist to make the provision applicable. Where compliance with one or more elements suffices, or where existence of one or more elements makes the provision applicable, "or" (rather than "and/or") is used. 3."Shall" is mandatory and "may" is permissive. 1.8RESPONSIBILITY A.Examine the project site and become familiar with existing conditions that will affect the work. Review the drawings and specifications of other trades and take note of conditions to be created which will also affect the work. B.Provide sensors, equipment and supervision required for work in "confined spaces". C.No energized conductors shall be exposed at any time except when the immediate area is under the direct supervision of a qualified electrician. D.Provide temporary insulated magnetic covers for open panelboards. Use SP Products (1-800-233- 8595) Type TPC xx-xx or approved equivalent. E.Locate equipment, which must be serviced, operated or maintained, in fully accessible positions. F.Verify location and size of each motor, and properly connect motors. G.Responsibility shall not end with installation and connecting of various apparatus. Include services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the work. Provide qualified journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including equipment and materials furnished by other trades or by the Owner. 1.9DAMAGE A.Be responsible for damage to the work of other trades or to the building and its contents caused by the electrical installation. 1.10GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE A.Material and equipment shall be fully guaranteed to be free from defects and to be new equipment. No secondhand, used or salvaged equipment will be allowed. B.Keep entire portion of the work in repair, so far as defects in workmanship, apparatus,material or construction are concerned, without additional cost to the Owner, for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, except as otherwise specified. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-4 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C.Equipment installed which fails to meet performance ratings specified or shown on drawings shall be removed and replaced by new equipment which meets specified requirements, without additional cost to the Owner. D.Material and workmanship shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, in whose presence various tests shall be made as required by these specifications. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIALS A.Submit to the Architect/Engineer, for review, when requested, a complete list of subcontractors' materials and equipment proposed to be used. See Section 013300. The entire list must be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer before entering into any subcontractual agreement. Equipment, materials and devices shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, whether or not said items are specified. Review does not imply approval of subcontractors or materials. 2.2STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A.Material shall be new, complete with manufacturer's guarantee or warranty, and shall be as listed by UL, if a standard has been established by UL for the type of material. Approved manufacturers shall be firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of equipment of types and capacities required and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three years. B.Methods and techniques of installation shall be subject to review by the Architect/Engineer. C.Material shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product. Materials of the same type or class shall be the products of one manufacturer. For example, panelboards shall be from the same manufacturer and lighting switches from the same manufacturer. D.Material shall be protected from damage and stored indoors at all times, unless other storage arrangements are reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. E.Material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F.The equipment manufacturer and installing contractor shall carefully check that the installed, operating equipment can be properly serviced. If the manufacturer or the contractor has any reservations in this regard, they shall state their reservations and suggested changes in a separate letter addressed to the Architect/Engineer, and shall include this letter as part of their shop drawing submission. Architect/Engineer will work out required changes and adjustments in contract prices where such adjustments are warranted. No adjustment in contract price will be allowed for additions required by applicable code, ordinance, statute, utility regulation or labor regulation. It is the obligation of the contractor to include such items in his original bid. Changes in equipment shall be incorporated in shop drawings. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-5 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS If the contractor fails to call such reservations or suggestions to the Architect/Engineer's attention, in writing, before any work is done or equipment is purchased, it shall be assumed that the contractor accepts the responsibility for providing a safe, coordinated and complete installation. If at a later date, changes become necessary to assure a safe, coordinated and complete installation, the changes shall be made without increase in contract price. G.Equipment, devices, apparatus, systems and installations shall be entirely suitable and safe for each intended application in every respect, and must not create conditions which would be harmful to occupants of the building, to operating personnel, to installation personnel, to testing personnel, to workmen or to the public. The contractor shall be solely responsible for providing installationsthat will meet these conditions. If the contractor believes that the installation will not be safe for all parties, he shall so report to the Architect/Engineer, in writing, before any equipment is purchased or work is installed, giving his exact recommendations. H.Where the specifications or drawings state that equipment shall be "furnished," "installed" or "provided," it shall be understood to mean that the contractor shall furnish and install that equipment completely, unless it is specifically stated that the equipment is to be furnished or installed by other trades, public utility companies or the Owner. 2.3MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS A.Proposals as submitted shall be based on the products specifically named in the specification or the equivalent. Furnishing material or equipment by manufacturers other than those specified shall only be by permission of the Architect/Engineer. Such permission for substitution must be requested, by the Bidder/Vendor, in writing, at least 14(14) calendar days prior to bid openingtime. The request shall identify the differences in the alternate material or equipment as compared to that specified, and shall indicate the benefits to the project as a result of selecting the alternative. B.Furnish to the Architect/Engineer, when requested, samples of proposed material or equipment substitutions. These samples shall remain with the Architect/Engineer as long as they desire. C.Changes required by alternate equipment shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Re-design costs incurred by the Architect/Engineer and costs incurred by other trades, public utilities, or the Owner as a result of the use of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. D.The Architect/Engineer reserves the sole right for the approval of proposed material or equipment, and the phrase "or an approved equivalent" used in these specifications or on the drawings shall be interpreted to mean an equivalent approved by the Architect/Engineer. E.The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse approvalof equipment which does not meet the specification, in their opinion, or of equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. The Architect/Engineer further reserves the right to reject equipment for which maintenance service and the availability of replacement parts is questionable. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-6 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 3EXECUTION 3.1EXISTING CONDITIONS A.Examine the existing grounds and become familiar with conditions as they exist, or that will, in any manner, affect the work under this contract. No allowance will be made subsequently, on the behalf of the contractors, for error or negligence on their part in connection with this. B.Conduit shall generally be concealed in the existing portion of the building. Review plans and specifications to determine where new ceilings and walls are to be installed, and make use of these areas to conceal conduit. Do not use surface raceways unless approved by the Architect/Engineer. C.Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in a manner that will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating or other site or building work. 3.2TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.Provide temporary electrical utilities as described in the detailed contractual description preceding the Electrical Specifications.Electrical contractor shall be responsible to provide temporary power for construction. Coordinate with Alliant Energy. B.Provide temporary lighting, as required, to light all construction areas, ramps, runways, corridors, shops and storage areas to a minimum of 10 foot-candles while any work is in progress. First aid stations, infirmaries and offices shall be lit to a minimum of 30 foot-candles. C.Temporary services shall meet OSHA requirements. D.Pay costs necessary to remove or relocate any existing private, public ormunicipally owned electrical service or telephone service, which are on or adjacent to the Owner's property, and which will interfere with or would be disturbed by the work of this trade or any other trade on this project. E.Expedite the work of installing the main service and other work necessary so that the heating system may be operated when required, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. 3.3ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTCONCRETE PADS A.Floor mounted electrical equipment shall be mounted on a four (4) inch high concrete pad. Size bases to extend a minimum of 4" inches beyond equipment base in any direction and 4" above finished floor. Such required pads not shown on the structural or architectural drawings shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor, by experienced cement finishers and not by electricians. This shall include pads for equipment such as freestanding switchboards, transformers, and motor control centers. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath based for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-7 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3.4CONCRETE AND MASONRYWORK A.Concrete work included in the specifications or shown on the drawings shall be done by experienced cement finishers and not by electricians. Brickwork, where included, shall be laid by experienced brick masons. Brick shall be of uniform size, hard burned, and shall be laid in cement mortar, except for patchwork at a location where cement and lime mortar has previously been used. Exposed, finish brickwork shall match existing brickwork as closely as practical and shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 3.5FIRESTOPPING A.Furnish and install "through-penetration fire stop systems," consisting of field constructed assemblage of products and materials, designed to prevent the spread of fire and gases through fire-rated openings which are commonly made through walls and floors to accommodate penetrants such as: busway, cable tray, electrical cables and conduits. B."Through-Penetration Fire Stop" is a material, device or construction installed to resist, for a prescribed time, the passage of flame, heat and gases through openings which penetrate the entire fire resistive construction in order to accommodate penetrating items. Incorporating the use of specific products installed in a specific manner, they shall only be installed in configuration for which they have been specifically tested and listed by UL or FM per UL-1479 or ASTM E-814. C.Where a specific fire stop system is not specified for a through-penetration, the contractor shall include proposed fire stop system designs in submittals. D.Where there is no specific UL fire stop system available for a particular application, the contractor shall obtain from the fire stop manufacturer a system drawing to be submitted for approval, prior to installation. E.Holes or voids used to extend electrical installation through fire-rated floors, ceilings and walls shall be firestopped with a fire resistant foam sealant to prevent the passage of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration either before, during or after a fire. Chase Technology Chase-Foam, CTC PR-855. F.The materials and components of an approved fire stop system shall be the products of a single manufacturer and shall not be inter-mixed. G.Fire stop materials used shall be suitable and compatible with the penetrating item(s) including the surrounding materials. H.Fire stop materials used in exposed area shall be paintable and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. 3.6IDENTIFICATION A.Each device shall be identified according to the following system: 1.Panels and switchboard shall be identified as to panel designation, voltage and feeder,e.g., "Panel L1, 120/208 volts, FeederFDP-1." Markings shall be outsidethe door. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-8 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.Magnetic motor starters, safety switches, and remote push button stations shall be identified with the starter number, name and number of device controlled, and circuit number, e.g., "MS-1, Air Handling Unit 1, Circuit L1-24". 3.Manual motor starters shall be identified with the name and number of the device controlled and circuit number, e.g., "Exhaust Fan 1, Circuit L1-31". 4.Time clocks, contactors and relays shall be identified with a nameplate indicating the devices controlled, e.g., "Security Light". 5.Exhaust fans shall be identified at the disconnect switch with the circuit number. 6.Service disconnecting means shall be permanently identified on the exterior, e.g. "Main Service Disconnect". 7.Panel circuit number shall be identified on the convenience outlet and light switch box, or the backside of the plate with embossed lettering plastic tape or indelible marking pen. 8.Junction and pull box covers shall be labeled with circuits contained within. Mark on outside with permanent marker in concealed or mechanical spaces, or inside the cover in public areas. 9.Three phase outlet cover plates shall have special 1/8" engraved lettering "208 volt, 3 phase". B.Identification shall be engraved, laminated plastic using white letters on black background, unless otherwise specified. C.Feeders located in tunnels, pipe chases, or other accessible locations shall be identified as to feeder number and voltage at least once, and then at 50 feet intervals. Means of identification shall be white stenciled letters, 1-1/2 inches high, on a black background. D.Accessible junction boxes and conduit for the emergency power system shall be identified in a manner as described in paragraph C above. In addition, receptacles connected to the emergency power system shall be identified by a special engraved cover plate with the word "EMERGENCY" and the circuit number, in 1/4-inch high letters. E.Color-coding of branch circuit wiring shall be as stated in the NEC. Color-coding of neutral conductors in conduit with multi-circuits shall be as stated in the NEC. Wires of sizes larger than No. 8 AWG shall be color coded by a strip around the conductor at junctions, pull boxes and terminating points. 1.Color-coding of wiring shall match existing. 2.Color-coding of wiring shall be black (A phase), red (B phase), blue (C phase) for 120/208- volt three-phase system with white neutral. 3.Color-coding of 277/480 volt system shall be brown (A phase), orange(B phase), and yellow (C phase), with gray neutral. 4.Color-coding of grounding wires shall be green. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-9 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3.7ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT A.Furnish power wiring for the temperature control equipment. B.Cooperate with other trades on the locations of the outlet boxes, switches and controls. C.Devices or equipment requiring both electrical and mechanical connections shall be installed by the contractor furnishing the device or equipment. Remaining connections shall then be made by the appropriate contractor. D.Where circuits serving specific items of equipment are shown on the electrical drawings, the breaker ratings, number of poles, and conductor sizes are nominal for the general class of equipment that includes each specific item. Final sizes shall be coordinated with the Owner or with the contractor furnishing the equipment. 3.8EQUIPMENT BY OTHER CONTRACTORS A.Verify with other contractors the location of equipment requiring electrical connection, including control devices that are supplied by the other contractors. Make any necessary changes before roughing-in for power and control power circuits. B.Review drawings and specifications and be responsible for the proper electrical connection of equipment. Furnish labor and material, including flexible conduit for movable equipment, to completely connect outlets, receptacles, switches, starters, and limit switches for equipment furnished by other contractors. C.Review other sections of this specification, and be responsible for connecting the equipment to operate as described. 3.9EQUIPMENT BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR A.The Mechanical Trades will furnish motors for items supplied by them. Furnish necessary labor and material, including wire and lugs, to completely connect the equipment. B.Interlock contacts required on starters shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. C.Review other sections of this specification, and be responsible for connecting the equipment to operate as described. 3.10EQUIPMENT BY OWNER A.Verify with Owner the equipment being furnished. B.Review drawings and specifications and be responsible for the proper electrical connection of the equipment. Furnish labor and material, to completely connect equipment furnished by the Owner. C.Review other sections of this specification, and be responsible for connecting the equipment to operate as described. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-10 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS D.Be responsible for receiving, unloading and installing the equipment. Coordinate the installation of owner furnished equipment to include unloading equipment on dates determined by Owner's Representative, coordinating the placement of openings and furnishingthe accurate locations and size of required openings in the work. E.Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.Arrange for and schedule equipment delivery from the Owner's vendor to site. 2.Accept equipment on site, and notify Owner of equipment receipt in writing. Inspect equipment upon receipt, and notify Owner of damage caused during delivery. Equipment damaged after receipt on site shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. 4.Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish. F.Due to size of the equipment, the installation may require that the equipment be brought into the building through existing overhead doors and routed through the existing building and set in place. Once the equipment is unloaded it shall become the responsibility of the Contractor to provide complete and functioning electrical systems. G.The General Contractorwill provide a copy of the shop drawings for the equipment. 3.11INTERRUPTIONS A.Changes in electrical services shall be made so as to provide a minimum of interference with the operation of services in the building. When changes require shutdown of building services, notify the proper building authorities not less than 72hours in advance and obtain approval from these authorities before making changes. Such notices shall give duration and nature of shutdown. Temporary arrangements shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer or Owner.Interruption of electrical service or communications services affecting any part of the occupied premises shall only be scheduled on weekend dates approved in advance. Include premium time cost in bid. B.Commissioning of fire alarm systems shall be coordinated with the Owner and Authority Having Jurisdiction. C.Include costs for temporary wiring and overtime work required, in the Contract price. Remove temporary wiring at the completion of work. 3.12ROOF OPENINGS A.Roof openings required that are not shown on the structural or architectural drawings shall be cut and (if necessary) reinforced by the roofing contractor, and not by electricians. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-11 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3.13DEMOLITION A.Provide labor necessary to demolish the existing electrical system described in the contract documents. B.Demolition shall be complete, removing all exposed and accessible electrical materials back to load side final overcurrent device. Mark such devices as “SPARE”. 3.14CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Provide cutting and fitting necessary to properly install work, unless specifically noted otherwise in these specifications or shown on the drawings. Coordinate with other trades as required to minimize the damage and the amount of patching required. B.Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval. Carefully carry out any cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. 3.15EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A.Provide excavation and backfilling necessary in the construction of the work as shown on the drawings or as specified. Provide sheeting and bracing using proper materials that may be necessary for the protection of the foundations and walls of the building. Replace roads, curbs, walks, topsoil and dispose of surplus earth and debris as directed. B.Review procedures with Owner for testing, covering, and containment of surplus earth and debris prior to disposal. Include any costs not covered by the Owner. C.No materialsexcept clean sand shall be placed within six (6) inches of any pipe, sewer, conduit or cable. Backfill under sidewalks, drives, parking lots, building or any other finished areas shall be 100% clean sand. D.Backfill shall be placed and tamped pneumaticallyin six (6) inch lifts until pipe or conduit is covered with a minimum of twelve (12) inches of cover. Additional backfill to finished grade shall be placed and tamped pneumatically in ten (10) inch lifts. The Architect/Engineer's and Owner's representatives shall be notified prior to backfilling so that backfilling may be observed. E.Where conduit passes below footings or through foundation walls, the cavity around the conduit shall be well filled and tamped, with rich concrete composed of one part Portland cement to six parts of clean sand and gravel. F.Conduit and cable may be installed in advance of earth fills by the General Contractor. Such conduit shall be installed with backfill material adjacent to the conduit and with the compaction requirements asset forth for the General Contractor. G.Protect property from damage which might result from excavating and backfilling and protect persons from injury at excavations, by barricades, warnings and illumination. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-12 SECTION 26 0100 OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS H.Coordinate excavations with weather conditions to minimize possibility of washouts, settlements, and other damages and hazards. Provide temporary covering or enclosure and temporary heat as necessary to protect bottoms of excavations from freezing and frost action. Do not install electrical work on frozen excavation bases or subbases. 3.16PAINTING A.No painting or finishing is to be included under this contract except as noted. The finish of any item that has been marred, scratched, or damaged in any way, shall be repainted to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. 3.17CLEANING OF PREMISES A.Keep the premises clean of debris caused by the work at all times. Keep material stored, in areas designated by the Owner, in such a manner so as not to interfere with the progress of the work of other trades or with the operation of existing facilities. B.Interiors and exteriors of electrical panels shall be thoroughly cleaned. C.At the conclusion of the construction, the site shall be thoroughly cleaned of rubble, debris and unused material and shall be left in good order. Closed off spaces shall be cleaned of waste material, cartons, and wood frame members used in the construction. 3.18RECORD OF CHANGES MADE TO THE WORK A.Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of electrical plans and specifications upon which it is clearly and permanently marked in red and noted, in complete detail, any changes made. Include changes to location and arrangement of electrical apparatus or changes made in the electrical system and wiring as a result of building construction conditions or as a result of written instructions from the Architect/Engineer. Such record of changes shall be made daily and the marked plans and specifications shall be available for the Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time. B.Upon completion of the job, and before final payment is made, transmit the marked-up plans and specifications to the Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 26 0100 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems 26 0100-13 SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2.Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3.Sleeve seals. 4.Grout. 5.Common electrical installation requirements. 1.3DEFINITIONS A.EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B.NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.None required. 1.5COORDINATION A.Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1.To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2.To providefor ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3.To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4.So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B.Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Electrical 260500-1 SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL C.Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D.Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A.Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTMA53/A53M, TypeE, GradeB, Schedule40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B.Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C.Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1.Minimum Metal Thickness: a.For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches(1270 mm)and no side more than 16 inches(400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch(1.3 mm). b.For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches(1270 mm)and 1 or more sides equal to, ormore than,16 inches(400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch(3.5 mm). 2.2SLEEVE SEALS A.Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1.Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b.Calpico, Inc. c.Metraflex Co. d.Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2.Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 3.Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Electrical 260500-2 SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 4.Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.3GROUT A.Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTMC1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30- minute working time. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A.Installation shall conform to the recommended practices identified inNECA1-2010. B.Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items. C.Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D.Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E.Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B.Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C.Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D.Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E.Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F.Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches(50 mm)above finished floor level. G.Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch(6.4-mm)annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H.Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Electrical 260500-3 SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. I.Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division07 Section "Joint Sealants.". J.Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." K.Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units appliedin coordination with roofing work. L.Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch(25-mm)annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. M.Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1- inch(25-mm)annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.3SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A.Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B.Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and installin annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.4FIRESTOPPING A.Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 260500 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Common Work Results for Electrical 260500-4 SECTION 26 0519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Wires and cables 1.2REFERENCES A.American Wire Gage (AWG) B.National Electrical Code (NEC). C.Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.This Section includes the following: 1.Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2.Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Product Data:For each type of product indicated. 1.5QUALIFICATIONS A.Copper conductors shall be manufactured by American Insulated Wire Corp., General Cable, Pirelli Cable Corp., Rome Cable Corp., Southwire Co., Triangle/PWC Inc., Carol Cable Company, Cablec, Okonite or approved equivalent. B.All wiring shall be listed by UL. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1REQUIREMENTS A.Conductors used throughout this project shall be copper. B.Conductors used for the electrical distribution system at voltages less than 600 volts shall have 600- volt insulation. C.Color-coding shall be as stated in section 26 0100Identification. D.Six hundred (600) volt, insulated conductors, 6 AWG or larger, unless shown otherwise on the drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer, shall be of the following types: 1.Type THWN moisture and heat-resistant or THHN heat-resistant thermoplastic (polyvinyl chloride) insulation rated 75° C in wet and dry locations and 90° C in dry locations. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Low Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 0519-1 SECTION 26 0519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 2.XHHW, moisture and heat-resistant cross-linked polyethylene insulation rated 75° C in wet locations and 90° C in dry locations. 3.Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. 4.Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless steel wire mesh strain relief device at terminations to suit application. E.Six hundred (600) volt insulated conductors smaller than 6 AWG, unless shown otherwise on the drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer, shall be type THWN moisture-resistant thermoplastic (polyvinyl chloride) insulation rated 75° C in wet and dry locations. F.Conductors 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.Conductors 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. G.Conductors smaller than 12 AWG shall not be used on this project unless otherwise specified, except that 14 AWG may be used for control wire where the current is less than 10 amps and the conductor length for each run is less than 50 feet. H.Conductors installed within the ballast compartment of fluorescent fixtures shall be fullsize 150°C conductors in accordance with NEC Table 402.3. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Wiring shall be in conduit or approved raceways, unless directed otherwise by Architect/Engineer. B.For feeders, no more than three phase conductors per conduit shall be installed, unless specifically shown. C.For branch circuits, no more than six (6) phase conductors per conduit shall be installed, unless specifically shown. 1.Adjustment factors shall be applied based on NFPA 70, Table 310.15 (B) (3) (a) where more than six (6) current carrying conductors are installed in a conduit. Neutral conductors in circuits for ECM motors, and non-linear loads are considered current carrying conductors. Refer to NFPA 70 310.15 (B) (5) and (6) for additional conditions where the neutral conductor is considered a current carrying conductor. D.Each branch circuit shall have a separate neutralconductor. E.Cables of larger sizes shall be continuously lubricated with an approved compound, except as noted, at the pull-in point of the conduit so that no damage occurs to the insulation. Lubricant shall be Polywater Lubricant J or approved equivalent. Pulling tension on feeder runs over 200 feet in length shall be measured by a dynamometer and shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations. The feeders shall be run continuously, without splices. F.Where wire is run for a future motor connection, to be connected under a separate contract, at least four (4) additional feet of the feeder wire shall be pulled for future connection. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Low Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 0519-2 SECTION 26 0519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES G.Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. H.Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. I.Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm of slack J.Tests and inspections: 1.After installing conductors and cablesand before electrical circuitry has been energized, test serviceentrance and feeder conductorsfor compliance with requirements. 2.Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3.Provide test documentation with closeout documents. END OF SECTION 26 0519 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Low Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 0519-3 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Electrical System Ground 1.2REFERENCES A.American National Standards Institute (ANSI). B.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). C.National Electrical Code (NEC). D.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). E.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Grounding provides equipment protection by allowing protective devices to operate during electrical faults. B.Bonding of exposed metallic piping and structure for safety. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.None required. 1.5QUALIFICATION A.Conductors and connectors: see Section26 0519. B.Bare grounding conductors shall be ES-1895 DSA, as manufactured by Copperweld or approved equivalent. C.Ground rods shall be copper-clad as manufactured by Copperweld or approved equivalent. D.Compression connections shall be as manufactured by Blackburn, Burndy, or approved equivalent. E.Exothermic connections shall be as manufactured by Cadweld, Furseweld, or approved equivalent. F.Grounding materials shall meet applicable standards and codes. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Ground & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 0526-1 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1REQUIREMENTS A.Ground system shall be as shown on the drawings and as required by the NEC. B.Direct buried, bare copper, grounding conductors shall be tinned copper sized per NFPA 70, but not smaller that #2/0.. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Grounding or bonding connection required for electrical equipment including (but not limited to) the following: 1.Conduit and raceways. 2.Panelboards . 3.Motor Starters. 4.Boilers. 5.Building Steel. 6.Metal, non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment. 7.Exposed metallic water pipingincluding fire sprinkler piping. 8.Other metal piping, including gas piping that is likely to become energized. B.The grounding electrode system shall conform to these specifications, but in no case shall it be less than the requirements of the NEC 250.53. C.Agrounding conductor shall be run in the raceway with the current carrying conductors, unless shown otherwise. D.An equipment-grounding conductor sized in accordance with Table 250.122 of the NEC shall be provided from the main equipment grounding bus to eachpanelboard. An equipment-grounding conductor shall be provided from the main equipment grounding bus or from the grounding bus of the serving panel, with all equipment feeders and branch circuits. E.All ground conductors shall be installed in an approved raceway. Where metal(magnetic) conduit is used for mechanical protection of a grounding conductor, the conductor shall be securely bonded to the conduit at each end. This conduit shall be electrically continuous. Within computer rooms, non- magnetic conduit shall be used for grounding conductor protection. F.Accessible or exposed grounding connections shall be made with approved pressure type connectors. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Ground & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 0526-2 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS G.Water/gasline ground clamps (4" line and smaller) shall be Burndy GCxxA or approved equivalent. Lines larger than 4" shall be Burndy GARxxxxBU or approved equivalent. For gas line grounding, isolate dis-similar metal bolts from pipe. H.Inaccessible or buried grounding connections may be listed compression type or exothermicwelds. I.Building Steel ( Standard Beams): Ground connections shall be Burndy YGIBxxx or approved equivalent, or as shown on drawings. J.Check the continuity of ground in the electrical system. This shall include panels, receptacles, switches, outlets, and other electrically operated devices. If continuity does not exist, install additional grounding conductors such that continuity exists. END OF SECTION 26 0526 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Ground & Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 0526-3 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Conduit and raceway. 1.2REFERENCES A.National Electrical Code (NEC). B.Conduit shall carry the Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) label. C.Conduit shall meet the following American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Federal Specifications (FS) standards: 1.Rigid MetalConduit (RMC): FS WW-C-581 and ANSI C80.1. 2.Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): FSWW-C-581UL6, UL6,and ANSI C80.1. 3.Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): FS WW-C-563,UL797,and ANSI C80.3. 4.Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): FS WW-C-566, CSA, UL. 5.Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit(LFNC): CSA, UL. 6.PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA Standards Pub. No. TC3. D.Installation shall be in compliance with NECA Standard 101-2006 unless otherwise specified. 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.This Section includes raceways and fittings for electrical wiring. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.None required. 1.5QUALIFICATIONS A.Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be Carlon Type 40 PV-DUIT (heavy wall) or approved equivalent. B.Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be Electri-Flex, Type LA or approved equivalent. C.Surface raceway assemblies shall be Wiremold Co., Walker T&B or approved equivalent. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Raceway & Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 0533-1 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1REQUIREMENTS A.Conduit smaller than ¾-inch diameter shall not be used onthis project, except ½-inch diameter EMT may be used for (1) switch legs, or (2) for temperature control wiring wherever acceptable to the mechanical/temperature Control Contractor. B.Only threaded type connectors and couplings shall be used with RMC,or IMC. C.Connections between EMT, or rigid conduit and PVC shall be made with threaded PVC adapters or fittings. D.RMC, IMC, flexible conduit or flexible liquid tight conduit including fittings and hangers used throughout this project shall be galvanized steel. E.Connectors for EMT shall be steel or malleable iron. Die cast metal fittings will not be permitted on this project. Connectors shall be compressiontypefor conduit 3” diameter and larger.Connectors shall be set-screw type for conduit smaller than 3” diameter. F.Type LA Liquatite flexible conduit, with appropriate fittings which are UL listed as an assembly, shall be used in a boiler room, kitchen, exterior location or any moist location. G.All horizontal fire alarm and controls conduit shall be red and blue respectively; vertical shall be its default factory finish H.Surface racewayassemblies: 1.Sheet metal channel with fitted cover. 2.Size: As required or as shown on the drawings. 3.Finish: Buff enamel. 4.Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer’s standard accessories. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Wiring shall be in conduit or approved raceways, unless shown otherwise. B.Conduit and outlet installation shall be concealed throughout this project, as follows unless otherwise indicated. 1.Conduit or Racewayabove suspended ceilings shall be supported from the building structure and not from the ceiling grid hanger wires. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Raceway & Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 0533-2 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.Unless otherwise noted, conduits concealed under floor shall not be routed in concrete slabs- on-grade, but shall be routed in at least six(6) inches of drainage fill beneath the bottom of the slab. Conduit shall not contact the slab unless protected by a vapor barrier such as Vis Queen. 3.Metallicconduit installed in concrete or underground, or in duct banks, shall be protected with an enamel and tape (applied hot), or with PVC coating. Damage and voids in the protective coating shall be repaired after installation and prior to installing concrete or backfill. 4.Conduit, under floors, shall be PVC, unless shown otherwise. Risers and elbows shall be metallic conduit. 5.Conduit supports on openroofs: Provide supports that do not damage or penetrate the roofing material. Provide strut supports as required for a complete system. Provide B-Line C-Port System supports or approved equivalent.There shall be no horizontal conduit runs on the roof in excess of 10 feetlength. 6.PVC may be embedded in concrete where shown on drawings. C.Conduit throughout thisproject shall be EMT installed with steel support straps except where shown otherwise or as follows: 1.Conduits 3inches trade size andlarger for power feeders shall be RMCconduit unless shown otherwise. 2.Conduit for fire alarm, data cable, telephone, sound, and other communications systems shall be EMT regardless of size. 3.In mechanical equipment rooms,and in other areas where conduit may beexposed to physical damage, including industrial technology shops, janitor closets, exposed in corridors, student restrooms, locker rooms and gymnasiums, RMCconduit shall be installed for wiring systems. 4.Flexible metal conduit, type FMC shall be permitted in lengths not exceeding 6ft for final connections to motors or equipment, unless liquidtite flexible metal conduit, type LFMC is required for the environmental conditions or otherwise noted. D.Conduit shall not be run horizontally in masonry walls or in masonry wall gaps. E.Conduit shall not be used as the sole grounding means. F.Nonmetallic conduit located underground, outside the building area, shall be installed a minimum of 36 inches below grade, unless otherwise indicated. Conduit shall be installed in a sand backfilled and compacted trench with a 2" wide yellow poly marker tape placed in the trench approximately 6" below finished grade. G.Metallic conduit, cut with a power saw or hacksaw, shall be reamedto remove burrs. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Raceway & Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 0533-3 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS H.Conduit bends shall be held to as large a radius as possible for ease in pulling of conductors and to provide a neatly installed appearance. The maximum length of straight conduit runs shall be 200 feet between pull boxes, with 50 feet deducted for each 90-degree bend and 25 feet deducted for each 45- degree bend; reduction of length for all other angle bends shall be calculated on a similar basis. I.Conduit risers below grade, inside and outside the building, shall have the bend weighted with concrete to prevent the conduit from lifting when cables are pulled. J.No conduits shall be routed in elevator equipment rooms or shafts except those required for the elevator power and communications. K.No conduits shall be routed in the floor beneath or near boilers. L.Suspended type conduit hangers for 2-inch and smaller conduit shall be with mounting devices, similar to Unistrut or Kindorf beam clamps. Hangers for groups of conduit with any size larger than 2-inch shall be channel type structural shapes, with conduits clamped to channel with U-shaped clamps. M.PVC conduit shall be installed underground only, or where specifically shown shall be installed away from high temperature piping. PVC conduit shall be cut with a fine tooth blade or knife, and burrs removed from the cut edge. Connections between EMT,or rigid conduit and PVC shall be made with threaded PVC adapters or fittings. N.When conditions are such that moisture may move through the conduits/raceways and contact energized live parts, or, when building ventilation conditions are such that the air may flow continuously in conduits/raceways, the conduit/racewayshall be sealed at each end with a pliable duct sealing compound such as Duct-Seal, Kerite Putty, Chase Technology foamor Hydra-Seal S-60WTF foam. If conduit is installed with possible access to rodents, the conduit shall be sealed in a manner similar to that described above. O.Interferences 1.Conduit runs are not shown to allow this contractor to choose the route to the various electrical devices. However, care shall be taken to coordinate the conduit runs with duct work, beams, joists, plumbing pipes, and plumbing fixtures to be installed by other trades. 2.When interference develops, the Architect/Engineer will decide which equipment will be relocated; regardless of which apparatus was installed first. P.Install conduit and wiring for electrical devices furnished by other trades or by the owner on this project,unless otherwise shown or specified. Q.Bushings 1.Conduits shall have insulated bushings installed at entrances to panelboards, starters, pull boxes and shall be secured to the enclosure by the bushing (and lock nut, if necessary) on the inside, and by lock nut on the outside. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Raceway & Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 0533-4 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.Conduits entering distribution type panelboards and the main switchgear shall have insulated grounding bushings similar to T & B 3800 series, with bushings connected together by means of a continuous copper grounding conductor, sized tomeet the requirements of the NEC. R.Rigid metal conduit, when used with non-metallic conduit, shall be effectively grounded. Buried or exposed conduits, elbows or offsets shall be effectively grounded. Use grounding bushings, or grounding clamps, Burndy GARxxxx or approved equivalent, where grounding bushings cannot be used. Connect ground clamp to nearest grounding electrode. S.Connectors, couplings and lock nuts shall be tightened securely by use of the proper tools to assure an effective and continuous path to ground through the conduit system. T.Wherever conduit crosses a building expansion joint and is constrained from relief deflection (i.e. buried in concrete or a straight run anchored in concrete on both sides of the joint), expansion fittings or expansion/deflection fittings shall be provided. U.Where wire is run for a motor connection, to be connected under a separate contract, the conduit shall be terminated in the proper fitting at the correct location. V.A short piece of flexible metal conduit shall beused in the feeder conduit near the motor only as final connection. The length shall not exceed 6 feet. W.Surface mounted conduit shall be mounted flush to wall and secured by two-hole clamps. X.Exposed raceway in all finished areas accessible by administrative staff, students, and general public shall be surface raceway assemblies (metal), except where shown otherwise. END OF SECTION 26 0533 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Raceway & Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 0533-5 SECTION 26 0533.01 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Pull, junction, and outlet boxes. 1.2REFERENCES A.National Electrical Code (NEC). B.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). C.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3QUALIFICATIONS A.Junction and pull boxes shall be as manufactured by Appleton Electric, Arrow-Hart, Bell Electric / Square D, General Electric, O.Z. / Gedney Co., Slater Electric Inc., or approved equivalent. B.Conduit bodies shall be as manufactured by Appleton Electric Co., Crouse-Hinds Co., Harvey Hubbell Inc., Killark Electric Mfg. Co., O.Z. / Gedney Co., Pyle-National Co., Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co., or approved equivalent. C.Bushings, knockout closures and lock nuts shall be as manufactured by Appleton Electric Co., Burndy Corp., Crouse-Hinds Co., Gould, Inc., O.Z. / Gedney Co., RACO, Inc., Steel City, Thomas and Betts Co., or approved equivalent. D.Interior outlet boxes shall be as manufactured by Appleton Electrical Co., Arrow Conduit and Fittings Corp., RACO, Inc., Steel City / Thomas and Betts Co. or approved equivalent. E.Weatherproof outlet boxes shall be as manufactured by Appleton, Bell Electric / Square D Co., Crouse-Hinds Co., Harvey Hubbell, Pyle-National, or approved equivalent. F.Weatherproof outlet boxes for "unattended wet locations while in use" per NEC 406.8(B) (latest edition), Tay Mac Series 20xxx or approved equivalent. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1REQUIREMENTS A.Provide galvanized, UL-code gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-held covers. Type, shape and size shall be as required to suit each respective location and installation. Boxes shall have welded seams with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. B.Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies of type, shape, and size to suit each respective location and installation. Bodies shallhave threaded conduit entrances, removable covers, and corrosion resistant screws. C.Provide corrosion resistant, punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, and offset connectors of type and size to suit respective uses and installation. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Pull & Junction Boxes 26 0533.01-1 SECTION 26 0533.01 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES D.Outlet Boxes 1.Interior outlet boxes shall be galvanized flat rolled sheet steel, of the type, shape and size, including box depth to suit each respective location and installation. Boxes shall have stamped knockouts in back andsides and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. a.Provide mounting brackets, wall board hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal straps to rigidly support outlet boxes as required for each outlet location. 2.Weatherproof outlet boxes shall be corrosion-resistant cast-metal wiring boxes of the type, shape and size, including box depth to suit each respective location and installation. Boxes shall have threaded conduit ends and threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. 3.Weatherproof switch and receptacle coverplates shall be case aluminum or zinc die cast with spring hinged waterproof caps, faceplate gaskets, and corrosion-resistant fasteners. E.Surface mounted single and multigang back boxes for electrical and electronic devices shall be matched to the device and coverplate, or device with integral coverplate spthat no part of the cover extends beyond the back box. Where installed exposed in public or normally occupied spaces, the back box used shall be solid on all exposed sides with no exposed knockouts. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Provide pull and junction boxeswhere requiredfor wiring and conditions of pull.Unless specifically shown on the drawings to be larger than required by the NEC, size pull and junction boxes in accordance with the minimum volumes set forth in the NEC. B.Fasten boxes rigidly to structural surfaces to which they are to be mounted or, solidly embed in concrete or masonry. C.Provide electrical grounding connections for installed boxes. D.Junction boxes above inaccessible ceilings for power, lighting, communication, and signal systems shall be located about one (1) foot from a recessed fluorescent fixture to allow easy access to the junction box, by removal of the fixture. E.Outlet Boxes 1.Provide 4" x 4" galvanized pressed steel outlet box at each receptacle, wall mounted light fixture, task light, wall switch, or any other device shown. 2.Outlet boxes exposed to weather or located in damp locations shall be galvanized cast iron, or malleable iron, or cast aluminum. Weatherproof switches and receptacles shall be mounted in "FS" (4-point mounting) boxes. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Pull & Junction Boxes 26 0533.01-2 SECTION 26 0533.01 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 3.Outlet boxes shall be plumb and level and shall be firmly secured in position, with the face of the box flush with the finished wall or ceiling. 4.Remove only knockouts which are required for connection of conduit or insertion of conductors. Provide plugsfor unused openings. 5.Conduit shall enter box squarely and shall be secured by means of lockout on outside and insulated bushing inside. 6.Provide electrical grounding connections for installed boxes. 7.Outlet boxes mounted on opposite side of fire rated wallsshall have a minimum 24" horizontal spacing. 8.Outlet boxes mounted on opposite side of non-fire rated walls shall have a minimum of 6" horizontal spacing. 9.Outlet boxes shall be mounted 18" above finished floor to center of box for receptacles and 48" for switched unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 10.All outlet boxes, pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be provided with a cover, suitable for the application. END OF SECTION 26 0533.01 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Pull & Junction Boxes 26 0533.01-3 SECTION 26 2813 FUSES PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Fuses. 1.2REFERENCES A.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following information 1.List of fuse types and manufacturer. 2.Time-current curves. 3.List of spare fuses to be provided. 1.4QUALIFICATIONS A.Fuses shall be by Bussmann Manufacturing Division of McGraw Edison Company or by Littelfuse Tracor Company. B.Fuses shall be UL listed for 100,000 ampere RMS interrupting capacity. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1FUSES A.Fuses shall be capable of interrupting the available fault without rupturingor damaging fuse clips, buswork, cable or switching components, and shall safely contain within the insulated barrel of the fuse the smoke, hot gases, carbon, and other harmful by-products of the fault. B.Fuses rated 600 amperes or less shall be UL Class R rejection type with time current characteristics as defined by the Bussmann or Littlefuse catalog number shown for each condition outlined herein. C.Fuses protecting molded case circuit breakers or molded case circuit breaker panels shall be current limiting silver link types. They shall have interrupting capacity and let through current as defined by the Bussmann or Littlefuse catalog type shown below, unless otherwise indicated or required by the circuit breaker manufacturer. 1.125 and 250 volt molded case circuit breakers shall be fed from switches fused as follows: a.0 to 60 amperes Bussmann LOWPEAK fuses Type LPN-R or Littelfuse Type LLN- RK. b.70 to 200 amperes Bussmann Limitron Fuses Type KTN-R or Littelfuse Type KLN- R. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fuses 26 2813-1 SECTION 26 2813 FUSES 2.277, 480, and 600 volt molded case circuit breakers shall be fed from switches fused as follows: a.0 to 100 amperes Bussmann LOWPEAK fuses Type LPS-R or Littelfuse Type LLSRK. b.110 to 300 amperes Bussmann Limitron Fuses Type KTS-R or Littelfuse Type KLSR. D.Fuses not sized on the drawings for motor running protection, 100amperes or less, shall be as follows: 1.Fuses shallbe Bussmann Fusetron (or Littelfuse "SLO BLO") dual-element time delay type FRN-R (or FLNR) for 250 volts or less, and FRS-R (or FLSR) for 277 through 600 volts sized at 125% of the motor nameplate full load running amperes or the next larger NEC standard ampere size. Exceptions to the preceding are where excessive ambient temperature, high inertia motor loads, special motors, or frequent "ON-OFF" cyclic loads or other special circumstances require a larger or different type fuse to be approved by the Architect/Engineer. Such special circumstances shall be clarified with the Architect/Engineer not less than 72 hours prior to bid opening time. 2.Fuse reducers shall be used where switch fuse clip spacing is larger than the length of the required fuse. E.Plug fuses shall be Fustat Bussmann Type S (or Littelfuse Type S). F.Fuses for protection of grouped or racked lighting fixture ballasts shall have 100,000 amperes RMS interrupting capacity, shall be similar to Bussmann fuse type GLR mounted in type HLR fuse holders (or Littelfuse type LGR in LHR holders) and shall be ampere sized as recommended by the ballast manufacturer. G.Fuses for protection of each individual exterior pole mounted light fixture or ballast shall have 100,000 amperes RMS interrupting capacity, and shall be Bussmann fuse Type KTK mounted in Type HEB (or Littlelfuse type KLK in HLB holder) fuse holders located in a hand hole at the base of the pole or in a weatherproof fuse enclosure located on the pole, as shown on the drawings. H.Other fuses, unless otherwise noted, shall be dual-element, current limiting, silver link type Bussmann LOWPEAK fuse, Type LPN-R or Littelfuse Type LLNRKfor circuits rated 250 volts or less, and Bussmann LOW PEAK fuse Type LPS-R or Littelfuse Type LLSRK for circuits rated 277 through 600 volts. They shall have at least 10seconds time delay at 500% rating. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1FUSES 1.Fuses shall be installed as shown on the drawings after tests, inspections and the installations have been completed. Fuses shall be of the same manufacturer to retain selectivity and electrical coordination as designed. Fuses shall have dimensions andrejection features exactly as defined herein. Fuses having any other type rejection feature are not acceptable. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fuses 26 2813-2 SECTION 26 2813 FUSES 2.Three spare fuses of each size 601 amperes and larger and 20% of other fuses, including control circuit fuses of each amperage and voltage rating (minimum of 3), shall be furnished to the Owner. END OF SECTION 26 2813 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Fuses 26 2813-3 SECTION 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Safety disconnect switches. 1.2REFERENCES A.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). B.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Disconnect switches provide safe disconnecting of electrical power to equipment. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following information: 1.Outline drawing with dimensions. 2.Equipment Ratings. a.Voltage. b.Capacity. c.Horsepower. d.Short circuit withstand rating. 1.5QUALIFICATIONS A.Safety switches shall be NEMA heavy-duty type and shall carry the UL label. Fusible switches shall incorporate Class "R" fuse rejection feature and shall be braced to withstand50,000 ampere RMS symmetrical fault current. B.Switches shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboards. C.Safety switches used for service entrance equipment shall be UL listed as suitable for service entrance. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1Provide heavy-duty type, sheet steel enclosed, safety switches. Type, size, and rating shall be as shown on the drawings or as required by the motor or equipment served.Switches shall be lockable in the "ON" and "OFF" positions. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers 26 2816-1 SECTION 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.2Switches shall incorporate quick-make, quick-break operating handles. Mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, and switches shall have a cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door in the on position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. Current carrying parts shall be constructed of high-conductivity copper with silver-tungsten type switch contact. 2.3Fuse clips shall be positive pressure type reinforced rejection type fuse clips. 2.4Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 1. Enclosures for wet locations and for outdoor use shall be NEMA 3R. 2.5Equip each motor disconnect with auxiliary contacts (1-NO, 1-NC).Disconnect switches utilized with variable speed motor controllers shall be interlocked with the drive control circuit. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1Furnish and install safety disconnect switches (fused and non-fused) shown on the drawings. In addition, furnish a safety disconnect switch for motors and equipment which do not have combination starters or integral disconnecting means. 3.2All disconnect switches required for motors and mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by Division 26 contractor, unless specifically scheduled as having a "FACTORY INSTALLED DISCONNECT". 3.3For mechanical equipment rated for use onlywith fuses as indicated on the nameplate, provide fusible disconnect switchesinstalled in readily accessible locations. Such switches shall be two or three pole type, with solid neutral for 4-wire service, and shall have the proper current and voltage rating as required. 3.4Terminals of the proper size for wire as shown on the drawings for line, load and ground shall be supplied by the disconnect switch manufacturer. 3.5Each motor shall be individually protected. Furnish a safety disconnect for each motor as required by the NEC. 3.6Disconnect switches shall not be directly mounted to equipment which is mounted on vibration isolation pads or springs, unless a piece of flexible conduit is used between thedisconnect switch and the fixed conduit. 3.7Safety switches shall be mounted securely to walls, columns or machine frames, and provided with brackets, mounting devices, structural pieces and expansion type anchor inserts necessary for this purpose. Switches shall not be mounted directly to metal surfaces or to concrete or masonry walls. Structural channels such as Kindorf or 3/4" plywood shall be used to mount switches at least 3/4 inch away from the mounting surface. 3.8Switches shall be mounted at a height of 60 inches above the finished floor to the top of the back box. 3.9Coordinate fuseable switches and fuse sizes, with mechanical trades, where required by UL listing for mechanical equipment installation. 3.10Disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes, or raceways for conductors feeding through or tapping off to other switches. 3.11Motors larger than 1/8 horsepower and controllers shall have a disconnecting means within sight and within 50'. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers 26 2816-2 SECTION 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS A.Combination motor starters, circuit breakers in panelboards, manual motor starters, integral disconnecting means on equipment, and cord/plug connections may be used as disconnecting means where they are within sight and 50' of the equipment. B.Switches, combination starters, and circuit breakers which are pad-lockable inthe "OFF" position may be used as disconnecting means when not in sight or within 50' unless prohibited by local code. C.Provide a disconnect switch for motors, motor-driven appliances, and controllers not covered by paragraphs A or B above. 3.12Transformers shall have a disconnecting means compliant with NFPA 70 and as indicated on the drawings. 3.13Guarantee equipment and wiring to be free from mechanical and electrical defects and faulty workmanship for a period of two years from the date of acceptance by the owner. Any replacement of parts or adjustments, including labor cost, made necessary by mechanical or electrical defects shall be rendered without additional cost to the owner within the guarantee period. END OF SECTION 26 2816 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers 26 2816-3 SECTION 26 2913 MOTOR STARTERS PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Starters. 1.2REFERENCES A.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). B.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Starters provide control of and protection for electric motors. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01330: 1.Wiring diagrams. 2.Electrical ratings. a.NEMA size. b.Voltage. c.Current. 3.Number of poles. 4.Coil voltage. 5.Physical characteristics including enclosure size. 6.Time -current curves for all breakers requiring settings and fuses. 1.5QUALIFICATIONS A.Magnetic motor starters shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley Co., Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. B.Manual motor starters shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley Co., Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse, General Electric, or Square D. C.Motor starters shall be by the same manufacturer. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Motor Starters 26 2913-1 SECTION 26 2913 MOTOR STARTERS PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1Magnetic motor starters shall meet the following specifications: A.Combination magnetic motor starters shall have a fusibledisconnect type switch motor circuit protector unless shown otherwise. B.Provisions for locking the disconnecting means handle in either the ON or OFF position. C.Minimum starter size shall be NEMA Size 1. D.Heater element or sensor size shall be based on the nameplate full load current rating of the motor. E.Each starter shall contain a fused control circuit with the fuse properly sized by the Starter Manufacturer to protect the coil of the starter. Control transformers shall be protected by such a fuse in the primary and secondary circuits of the transformer. Furnish 20% spare fuses of each amperage used (minimum of three) to the Owner. F.Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 1, unless shown otherwise. G.Enclosures forwet locations or outdoor use shall be NEMA 3R, unless shown otherwise. H.Two speed motor starters and reversing starters shall have time-delay relays to permit motors to coast to a stop prior to restarting at a different speed or reversing. Verify with themotor supplier, whether each two-speed motor is separate winding or consequent pole, prior to submitting shop drawings for the corresponding motor controllers. 2.2For each magnetic starter supplied, provide a hand-off-automatic (HOA) selector switch, red run pilot light, (2) no and (2) NC auxiliary contacts, control power transformer with fusing, and heater motor protective elements. Supply additional push buttons, and similar control devices, not specifically furnished by other trades or by the owner but that are required for proper operation of the specific motor. These devices shall be by the same manufacturer as the starters. 2.3Motors smallerthan ½ horsepower, unless shown otherwise, shall have toggle switch type manual starters with thermal trip (TT) overload protection and pilot light. Flush mounted manual starters shall have a stainless steel cover plate. Manual starters shall be similar to Square D Type F, Class 2510 Cat. No. FS1P or approved equivalent. 2.4Motors, ½horsepower and larger, shall have magnetic motor starters. 2.5Terminals of the proper size for wire (as shown on the drawings for line, load, and ground) shall be supplied by the motor starter manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1Furnish and install motor starters and power and control wiring, complete as specified, unless shown otherwise. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Motor Starters 26 2913-2 SECTION 26 2913 MOTOR STARTERS 3.2Starters shall be mounted securely to walls, columns, or machine frames, and provided with the brackets, mounting devices, structural pieces, and expansion type anchor inserts necessary for this purpose. Starters shall not be mounted directly to metal surfaces or to concrete or masonry walls. Structural channels such as Kindorf or 3/4" plywood shall be used to mount starters at least 3/4 inch away from the mounting surface. 3.3The top of each magnetic motor starter shall be mounted 60 inches above the finished floor unless shown otherwise. 3.4The top of the box for manual motor starters shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor unless shown otherwise. 3.5Motor starters furnished with "hand-off-automatic" switches, but not wired for automatic operation, shall have the reference to automatic deleted from the switch label by paint, revised nameplate, or other permanent means. 3.6Mount motor starters adjacent to or on the equipment served,unless shown otherwise. END OF SECTION26 2913 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Motor Starters 26 2913-3 SECTION 26 2923 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Variable speed motor controllers. 1.2REFERENCES A.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). B.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). C.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Variable speed controllers provide speed control of electric motors. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following information: 1.Wiring diagrams. 2.Electrical ratings. a.NEMA size. b.Voltage. c.Current. d.Carrier frequency under normal conditions. e.Drive deratingguidelines. 3.Number of poles. 4.Coil voltage. 5.Physical characteristics including enclosure size. 6.Listing of settable parameters. 7.Warranty. B.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1.Operations and maintenance manuals shall be forwarded two weeks before shipment ofthe equipment and copies shall be included with the equipment. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Variable Speed Motor Controllers 26 2923-1 SECTION 26 2923 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 2.The operation and maintenance manuals shall include installation and handling requirements, initial start-up tests and adjustments, maintenance requirements, troubleshooting procedures and renewal parts lists. 1.5QUALIFICATIONS A.Variable speed motor controllers shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley Co., ABB, Square D Co., or Toshiba-Houston. B.Variable speed motor controllers shall be by the same manufacturer. C.Variable speed motor controllersshall be furnished with equipment, features, and functions as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. In addition, all controllers shall be furnished with any additional equipment required or recommended by the manufacturer to meet the requirements of these specifications such as isolation transformers, input filters, voltage step-up or step-down transformers, or power factor correction capacitors. D.Variable Speed motor controllers shall comply with IEEE Standard 519. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1Variable speed motor controllers shall meet the following specifications, unless shown otherwise. A.Door interlocked disconnect switch. B.NEMA 1 filtered ventilated enclosure. C.Input fused internally with standard or current limiting fuses. D.Bypass circuitry for direct line motor operation with a door mounted inverter/line selector switch. E.Start, stop, and speed selection for control of motors. F.Frequency range of 6 to 60 Hertz. G.Thermal overload relays on output for motor protection (down to approximately one-half motor base speed.) H.Short circuit protection, under/over voltage protection, and automatic restarting after a power outage. I.Resonance frequency null with field adjustable potentiometers to lock out any resonant speed. J.Transducer input for4 to 20mAungrounded signal. K.Adjustable offset voltages for increasing starting torque. L.Adjustable acceleration and deceleration control. M.Adjustable maximum frequency and minimum frequency control. N.Power ON light. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Variable Speed Motor Controllers 26 2923-2 SECTION 26 2923 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS O.Manual-off-automatic selector switch, to select the speed control source, and a manual potentiometer. P.Speed indicator and an ammeter. Q.Items D, N, O and P shall be mounted on the front cover, exposed. R.Operating ambient temperature shall be 0C to 40C. S.Digital operator keypad and display. T.Motor rated voltage per plans. 2.2Supply necessary remote operator control stations as shown on the plans. Remote stations shall be by the same manufacturer as the controllers. 2.3Variable speed controllers shall be of the power transistor type for motors five (5) horsepower or less and of the current source type using diode bridge rectification on the input for motors greater than five horsepower. A.Pulse width modulated inverters (unless provided with an isolated micro-processor logic power transformer) and voltage source inverters (unless provided with a diode bridge rectifier circuit) shall be acceptable when furnished with isolation transformers and/or filters to limit the interaction among controllers and to prevent interference with other electronics systems such as fire alarm, clock and program, energy management, security, sound, emergency generator, lighting control, etc. B.Controllers with an input power factor of less than 85% (0.85) at maximum rated speed and power output shall be corrected to 95% (0.95) minimum at maximum output. 2.4Select each variable speed motor controller to agree with the specific motor and motor application it is to control. Prior to submitting shop drawings, obtain information on the exact motor(s) to be supplied and shall select the controller(s) per the manufacturer's recommended procedure. 2.5Terminals of the proper size for wire as shown on the drawings for line, load and ground shall be supplied by the motor starter manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1Controllers shall be mounted securely to walls, columns, or machine frames, and provided with brackets, mounting devices, structural pieces, and expansion type anchor inserts necessary for this purpose. Controllers shall not be mounted directly to metal surfaces or to concrete or masonry walls. Structural channels such as Kindorf or 3/4" plywood shall be used to mount starters at least 3/4 inch away from the mounting surface. 3.2Top of each controller shall be mounted 60 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise noted. 3.3Free-standing controllers shall be mounted on housekeeping pads. See Section 26 0100regarding equipment concrete pad. 3.4Variable speed motor controller and control system supplier shall provide factory and field labor for complete calibration testing, and adjustment of the adjustable frequency drives and control components, and be responsible for setting control set points, operating sequences, and alarming systems within the specified control systems to produce the overall system performance as specified. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Variable Speed Motor Controllers 26 2923-3 SECTION 26 2923 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 3.5WARRANTY A.Manufacturer shall warrant equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of delivery. END OF SECTION 26 2923 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Variable Speed Motor Controllers 26 2923-4 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1GENERAL 1.1SECTION INCLUDES A.Surface, lay-in, recessed and pendant mounted fluorescent luminaires are included. B.Exit signs, batteries, using light emitting diode (LED) illuminators are included. C.Emergency (egress) lighting of the types using fluorescent and incandescent illumination, with and without batteries, are included. D.Fluorescent lamps. E.High intensity discharge (HID) lamps. F.Fluorescent ballasts. G.High intensity discharge (HID) ballasts. H.Light emitting diode (LED) illumination systems. 1.2REFERENCES A.American National Standards Institute (ANSI). B.Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM). C.Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). D.Federal Communications Commission (FCC). E.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). F.National Electrical Code (NEC) G.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). H.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA101. I.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) J.Exit signs shall be as listed by UL and shall meet UL924and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA101. K.Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA). 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Luminaires using energy saving lamps and energy saving ballasts provide area lighting. B.Exit signs identify exit path andoutlets. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-1 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING C.Emergency egress luminaires provide area lighting in accordance with NFPA 101, during power outages. D.Ballasts provide power to fluorescent and HID lamps. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Submit the following information: 1.Manufacturers' catalog cut sheets for each luminaire including: a.Complete catalog number ordering information. b.Description and interpretation of ordering information (catalog number). c.Luminaire schedule "plan mark" designation. d.Candela and candlepower distribution, zonal lumen summary. e.Coefficient of utilization. f.Physical dimensions and operating voltage. g.Ballast data (Manufacturer, Cat. No., PF, THD, BF, & LCCF) h.Lamp type, quantity and wattage. i.Housing construction and finish. j.Light loss factor data. k.Spacing/mounting height limit. l.Beam photometric (pattern) (Emergency lights). m.Options. n.If any of the above do not apply, so state. 2.List of luminaire features: a.Construction of housing and method of access. b.Coatings (type and process). c.Lens, diffuser. d.Reflector (material and coating). e.Mounting method. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-2 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING f.Seals, gasketing. g.Options. 3.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that luminaires meet or exceed specified requirements. 4.Manufacturer's published ballast warranty. 5.Ballast Registration Field Service Return Authorization forms as described in Section 26 5100,Paragraph 3.16. 1.5QUALIFICATIONS A.Luminaires shall be as scheduled and shown on the drawings. B.Substitution of luminaires will not be allowed unless approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to bid. Proposed alternate products must be submitted for pre approval a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the bid date. All required photometric ies format files and required sample products must be included. C.Luminaires shall meet these specifications and be UL labeled. Where a scheduled luminaire fails to meet or exceed these specifications, equivalent luminaires may also deviate to the same amount, but no greater. D.Luminaires shall be tested in accordance with applicable sections of NEMA LE "Lighting Equipment". E.Luminaires shall be as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule, or prior approved equivalent. F.Lampsshall be as manufactured by Phillips and shall be the Alto series, low mercury content. Special purpose lamps shall be as furnished by the luminaire supplier. G.Ballasts shall be electronic energy saving, normal power factor type, or as indicated on the drawings. H.Ballasts shall be UL Listed, Class P, ETL certified, and CBM certified by testing per ANSI. I.Ballasts shall meet ANSI C 62.41, C 82.1, C 82.2, and IEEE 587 requirements. J.Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be as manufactured by Advance, Motorola/General Electric, or Valmont Electric. K.HID lamp ballasts shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Osram Sylvania or Westinghouse. L.LED lighting systems must be tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79. Lumen maintenance shall be determined in compliance with IESNA LM-80. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-3 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A.Fluorescent luminaires shall have a full-length metal chassis and use four-(4) foot instant start lamps (unless shown otherwise on the schedules). Finish of steel surfaces, other than plated parts, shall be anti-rust treated by means of the bonderizing process and hot sprayed, baked-on, white enamel after fabrication. Units shall have top-plate reflectors. B.Lenses shall be of 100 percent UV stabilized virgin acrylic plastic, nominal 0.125 thickness, with a prismatic design unless shown otherwise on the drawings. C.Fluorescent luminaires with lenses shall be of the frame-in-frame type with the lens and its frame removable from the chassis and its frame. D.Ballasts shall be electronic, program start, energy saving type. Ballasts shall be accessible for servicing without removing or dismantling the luminaires. Ballasts shall be designed to operate one or two lamps. Three lamp luminaires shall have two ballasts; one for the center lamp and one for the lamps on each side. Ballasts shall be secured with stud or captive bolt and nut to facilitate replacement without removing the luminaire. E.Lamps shall mount in the same plane to provide even lamp obscuration. Three-lamp luminaires shall have the ballast compartment offset if necessary to allow center lamps to mountin the plane of the side lamps. Lamps shall be a minimum of 2" from the lens. F.Lamp sockets shall be of the biting edge type or phosphorous -bronze with silver flashed contact surface. Lamp holders for bi-pin lamps (except for "U" types) shall be of thesingle slot entry type requiring a one-quarter turn of the lamp after insertion. G.Light leaks around doorframe will not be permitted. Light traps shall be mechanical and shall not rely on foam gaskets or the ceiling grid for trapping light. H.Wire installedwithin the ballast compartment of fluorescent luminaires shall have 150C insulation as specified hereinbefore under Section 26 0519, Conductors and Cables. I.Troffersshall have the lens mounted in a metal doorframe. Doorframe shall be 20 gauge flat steel or aluminum of equivalent strength. Frame shall be held closed with spring-loaded latches. Frame shall be assembled with screws (not tabs) to permit repeated lens replacement. J.Troffers shall be a minimum of 4" deep from the bottom of the lens to the top inside of the chassis (not including the ballast cover) and shall be a maximum of 5-1/2" overall for standard troffers and 7- 1/2" for parabolic troffers. K.Luminairesinstalled in fire-rated ceiling shall be UL Listed and labeled for the assembly. Provide enclosure as required. See Architectural drawings for fire-rated ceiling locations. 2.2Incandescent luminaires (including quartz and tungsten halogen) shall be of the type and manufacturer as scheduled. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-4 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 2.3HID luminaires (including metal halide and sodium luminaires) shall be of the type and manufacture as scheduled. 2.4EXIT SIGNS A.General 1.Luminaires shall be white withwhitestencil face(s) and red letters and directional arrows. Lettering shall be 6" high with a 3/4" stroke. Colors shall be verified with the Owner after award of contract. 2.The exit sign shall have concealed knockouts or programmable directional arrows. B.Lightsource 1.Light source shall be light emitting diodes(LED's) with a life expectancy in excess of 20 years. Power requirements are minimum 5 watts per face. LED lamps shall provide 100% illumination in normal and emergency operation. LED's shall be high intensity red and shall have a clear lens to deliver optimum illumination of letters. 2.LED lamps shall be mounted inside the exit housing, not on the face. A color rich prismatic diffuser shall be mounted in front of the LED's to provide a full 3/4" letter stroke with even illumination. Brightness shall be equivalent to an exit sign legend illuminated at seven foot candles. 3.Lightsource shall be light-emitting, phosphor crystal. 2.5EMERGENCY LIGHTS A.General 1.Units shall have self-contained nickel-cadmiumbattery, solid-state fully automatic charger, solid-state transfer/brownout circuit, with low-voltage battery disconnect. 2.Units shall provide emergency light at rated output for a minimum of 90 minutes before battery voltage falls to 87-1/2 percent of nominal. 3.Charger shall provide automatic battery recharging to full charge within 12 hours after a full discharge. 4.Units shall have a test switch, charging indicator light, automatic battery protection, and shall be self-contained. B.Square luminaires shall be low profile, self-contained units for surface, semi-recessedor fully recessed mounting. Unit shall be white with a black base, and shall use a high-output ten-watt miniature tungsten-halogen lamp. Unit shall have a universal transformer for 120 or 277 volt operation. C.Provide five (5) year full warranty. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-5 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 2.6LAMPS A.Lamps of a given type shall be of the same manufacturer. B.Fluorescent Lamps: Unless otherwise shown, fluorescent tubes shall be of the four foot, T8, 32 watt, 3500K color temperature with an initial light output of not less than 2850 lumens. C.Incandescent Lamps: Unless otherwise shown, incandescent light bulbs shall be of the tungsten filament or quartz halogen type and of the size, wattage and configuration shown on the drawings. Lamps with aluminum bases shall be furnished with luminaires having aluminumsockets; brass bases with brass sockets. D.High Intensity Discharge Lamps: Lamps shall have the following average life expectancies: metal halide, 10,000 hours; high-pressure sodium, 24,000 hours. Metal halide lamps shall be pulse start type. 2.7BALLASTS A.Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Fluorescent lamp luminaires shall be equipped withprogrammedstart electronic ballasts. Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits as to EMI or RFI and not interfere with the operation of other normal electrical equipment. Ballasts that operate as a parallel circuit shall permit other lamps to continue functioning after one lamp has failed. Ballasts shall meet applicable ANSI and IEEE surge-protection standards. Ballasts shall withstand surges as specified in ANSI C62.41. Ballast features shall include the following: Input voltage of 108-132 volts (120-volt circuit) or 249-305 volts (277-Volt circuit) at 60 Hertz. Light output shall remain constant for line voltage fluctuation of +5%. Ballast shall limit inrush current internally to not exceed 7 amps at 120V and 3 amps at 277V. 1.UL Class P thermally protected. 2.Sound rating shall be "A" or better. 3.Operate lamps at a frequency of 20 to 35 kHz with less than 2% flicker. 4.Preheat lamp cathode before applying arc voltage. 5.Operate 1, 2, 3 or 4 lamps. 6.Not be affected by lamp failure. 7.Lamp current crest factor (LCCF) of less than 1.7. 8.Power factor (PF) greater than 97%. 9.Minimum starting temperature of 50° F. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-6 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 10.Total harmonic distortion (THD) less than 20%. 11.Minimum ballast factor (BF) of 0.90. 12.Minimum five-year warranty. B.HID Lamp Ballasts: Ballasts, except those that are an integral part of a luminaire, shall conform to the following requirements. 1.Ballasts for metal halide luminaires shall be pulse start type. 2.Ballasts shall be of the constant wattage autotransformer type. 3.Ballast shall be used for one or two lamps, with the primary protected by a remote fuse sized according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 4.Ballasts shall have a power factor greater than 0.9 and an LCCF lessthan 1.7. C.Ballasted luminaires in non-heated areas shall be furnished with low temperature ballasts suitable for operation to minus 20°F. 2.8Luminaires recessed into insulated ceilings shall be approved for zero-clearance insulation cover, by UL. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1Furnish and install luminaires and appurtenances, wired and ready for operation. 3.2Luminaires recessed in plastered ceilings shall be provided with plaster trim rings. Luminaires in acoustical ceilings shall have proper flange. Luminaires shall be removable from below. 3.3Luminaires shall be surface, recessed, or pendant mounted as shown on the drawings. Luminaires are shown in their approximate location and may be moved before installation, as directed by the architect/engineer, without additional charge to the owner. Cooperate with the trades installing the ceiling in locating recessed and surface-mounted luminaires. A.In inaccessible ceilings, where incandescent luminaires and fluorescent luminaires are in the same area, the junction box shall be mounted near the fluorescent luminaire opening and connected to the fluorescent luminaire with flexible conduit. B.Continuous rows of fluorescent luminaires shall be wired through each luminaire using an approved, 150C insulated conductor with the luminaire chassis asa raceway. Where fluorescent luminaires are installed in a grid-type ceiling and are not shown as continuous rows, connection to the luminaire shall be by means of a junction box above the ceiling with flexible conduit to the luminaire. C.Luminaires shall be supported per Article 410.16 of NEC. D.Where HID luminaires and fluorescent luminaires are in the same area, the junction box shall be mounted near the fluorescent luminaire opening and connected to the fluorescent luminaire with flexible conduit. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-7 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 3.4Surface or pendant-mounted luminaires shall be mounted on a structural channel such as Kindorf or Unistrut. 3.5Lay-in luminaires shall be mounted as shown on the drawings. Luminaires are shown in their approximate location and may be moved before installation, as directed by the architect/engineer, without additional charge to the owner. Cooperate with the trades installing the ceiling in locating the luminaires. A.Lay-in luminaires shall be connected using a 6' long piece of flexible conduit to allow easy removal or minor relocation of the luminaire. B.Alternate approved wiring method: where indicated on the drawings a manufactured wiring system may be used in lieu of conventional wiring methods. Refer to Section 26 0519. C.Luminaires shall be supported per Article 410.16 of NEC. Lay-in luminaires in suspended ceilings shall be secured to the grid with clips identified for such use. 3.6Furnish and install exit signs and appurtenances, wired and ready for operation, as shown on drawings. 3.7Furnish and install egress luminaires and appurtenances, wired and ready for operation, as shown on drawings. 3.8Provide charging power to battery reserve emergency lights and emergency exit signs from the date the batteries are received. In lieu of continuous charging from a temporary source, contractor may delay receiving and installing the batteries until after the units are installed in their final location and wired complete. In either situation, the batteries shall not be stored without power or allowed to discharge and charge repeatedly during construction. 3.9Use HID type 120/240 VAC circuit breakers feeding 120/208 VAC fluorescent and HID lighting circuits. 3.10Furnish lamps for luminaires as shown on the drawings and schedules. 3.11Luminaires used for temporary construction lighting shall have new lamps installed at the time the project is accepted by the owner. 3.12Lamps shall be fully seated in each luminaire. Sockets which will not permit proper lamp installation and operation shall be replaced. 3.13Remote ballasts shall be mounted vertically with twelve (12) inch vertical spacing and six (6) inch horizontal spacing between adjacent ballasts. Ballasts shall be mounted on ¾-inch structural channel that is securely mounted to the building structure. 3.14Provide ballasts and mounting with the appropriate luminaires, per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.15For fire rated ceilings, wood construction, and where recessed down-lighting is installed, install UL listed luminaire enclosure. Lightolier 'Fireline' or approved equivalent. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-8 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 3.16FLUORESCENT BALLAST WARRANTY A.Provide labor and material for ballast replacement for two(2) yearsafter substantial completion date at no cost to Owner. B.Provide copies of manufacturer's published warranty. C.Provide copies of manufacturer's Ballast Registration Field Service Returns Authorization forms. 1.Furnish blank copies for Owner's future use. 2.Provide completed copies as required with the luminaire/ballast information needed for a ballast replacement request. a.Provide copies for each ballast combination. b.Identify each item with the luminaire "Plan Mark". c.Identify any warranty periods which are less than that specified. d.Provide luminaire installation dates when installation date is more than six (6) months after the ballast manufacture date. e.Submit required paperwork to the ballast manufacturer. f.Contractor shall handle required paperwork for ballast replacement for the one (1) year period after substantial completion. After the one (1) year time period, Owner will handle ballast replacements. END OF SECTION 26 5100 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Interior Lighting 26 5100-9 SECTION 26 5950 OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1WORK INCLUDED A.Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein. B.Contractor/Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 16. C.Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC systems and building management systems. 1.2EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION A.Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not be allowed. B.All components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and local applicable code requirements. C.Products shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%. D.Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush current. Submittals shall clearly indicate the method used. 1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancysensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. B.The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits. C.Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications. The suppliers obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Occupancy Sensors 26 5950-1 SECTION 26 5950 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this specification by supplying the necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted. B.Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor. C.Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. D.Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification. E.Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used withelectronic ballasts. 1.5SYSTEM OPERATION A.It shall be the contractor's responsibility to make all proper adjustments to assure owner's satisfaction with the occupancy system. PART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 2.1ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.The Watt Stopper, or Hubbell Automation or Pre-Approved Equal: For pre-approval, provide all the information listed under section 1.04A and 1.04D a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to bid date. B.The listing of any manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for sensors which meet or exceed the specifications included herein. 2.2PRODUCTS A.Provide the following type of sensor per area unless noted otherwise on the Drawings: 1.Classrooms: Dual-Technology ceiling mounted. 2.Storage and Restrooms: Ultrasonic ceiling mounted. 3.Offices: Infrared wall mounted. B.Provide power pack units where required for operation of sensor. C.Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of occupancy at desktop level up to 300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Occupancy Sensors26 5950-2 SECTION 26 5950 OCCUPANCY SENSORS D.Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1200 watts at 277 E.Wall switch products shall utilize Zero Crossing Circuitry which increases relay life, protects from the effects of inrush current, and increases sensor’s longevity. F.Wall switch sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode for safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection. G.Wall switch sensors shall provide a field selectable option to convert sensor operation from automatic-ON to manual-ON. H.Vandal resistant wall switch sensors shall utilize a hard lens with a minimum 1.0mm thickness. Products utilizing a soft lens will not be considered. I.Passive infrared sensors shall utilize Pulse Count Processing and Digital Signature Analysis to respond only tothose signals caused by human motion. J.Passive infrared sensors shall utilize mixed signal ASIC which provides high immunity to false triggering from RFI (hand-held radios) and EMI (electrical noise on the line), superior performance, and greater reliability. K.Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Lodif Fresnel lens, in a multiple-tier configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up. L.In rooms indicated on the Drawings, passive infrared and dual technology sensors shall offer day lighting footcandle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level lighting. M.Dual technology sensors shall be corner mounted to avoid detection outside the controlled area when doors are left open. N.Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for occupancy detection. Products that react to noise or ambient sound shall not be considered. OUltrasonic sensors shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing to adjust the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space. P.Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled at 25 kHz within ± 0.005% tolerance, 32 kHz within ± 0.002% tolerance, or 40 kHz ± 0.002% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable. Q.All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads. R.Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans. S.All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed to limit tampering. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Occupancy Sensors26 5950-3 SECTION 26 5950 OCCUPANCY SENSORS T.In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering. U.All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. V. All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures. 2.3CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE -CU A.Control Units -For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Control unit shall provide power to a minimum of two (2) sensors. B.Relay Contacts shall have ratings of: 1.13A -120 VAC Tungsten 2.20A -120 VAC Ballast 3.20A -277 VAC Ballast C.Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II , 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable. Wiring shall be routed in conduit. D.Minimum acceptable wire gauge from the circuit control hardware relays shall be #14 AWG. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations.Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room. B.It is the contractors responsibility to arrange a pre-installation meeting with the manufacturer'sfactory authorized representative, at the owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Occupancy Sensors26 5950-4 SECTION 26 5950 OCCUPANCY SENSORS C. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation soas to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The contractor shall also provide, at the owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems. 3.2FACTORY COMMISSIONING A.Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the manufacturer's factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control system. This service is provided at an additional cost. B.The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with ten working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the system fine tuning the factory authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors. END OF SECTION26 5950 City High School Cafeteria HVAC Upgrades 111394-1 Occupancy Sensors26 5950-5